Canon | i-SENSYS LBP212dw | User manual | Canon i-SENSYS LBP212dw User manual

Canon i-SENSYS LBP212dw User manual
LBP215x / LBP214dw / LBP212dw
User's Guide
USRMA-3050-01 2018-12 en
Copyright CANON INC. 2018
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ...........................................................................................................
Installation
............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply
Handling
2
............................................................................................................................................................ 5
................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections
Consumables
.................................................................................................................................... 9
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Setting Up ..........................................................................................................................................................
Main Functions
14
....................................................................................................................................................... 15
Preparations Required Before Use
Preventing Unauthorized Access
.............................................................................................................................. 17
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
Setting the Date/Time
........................................................................................................................... 16
............................................................................................................................ 19
............................................................................................................................................. 21
Setting Up the Network Environment
...................................................................................................................... 23
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
Connecting to a Wired LAN
..................................................................................................................... 25
.................................................................................................................................. 26
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
............................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
....................................................................................... 29
........................................................................................... 31
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
....................................................................................... 33
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting IP Addresses
...................................................................................... 36
............................................................................................................... 39
........................................................................................................................................... 40
Setting IPv4 Address
..................................................................................................................................... 41
Setting IPv6 Addresses
Viewing Network Settings
.................................................................................................................................. 44
.................................................................................................................................... 47
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
Configuring Printer Ports
Setting Up Print Server
...................................................................................... 50
........................................................................................... 51
............................................................................................................................... 54
.................................................................................................................................. 57
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
Configuring Ethernet Settings
......................................................................................... 60
........................................................................................................................ 61
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
...................................................................................................... 63
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
.............................................................................................. 64
Configuring DNS
.......................................................................................................................................... 65
Configuring SMB
.......................................................................................................................................... 69
Configuring WINS
......................................................................................................................................... 71
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Other Network Settings
Installing Drivers
......................................................................................... 73
................................................................................................................................. 77
.................................................................................................................................................... 81
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 84
Parts and Their Functions
........................................................................................................................................ 87
I
Front Side
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Back Side
........................................................................................................................................................... 90
Interior
.............................................................................................................................................................. 91
Multi-Purpose Tray
Paper Drawer
.............................................................................................................................................. 92
..................................................................................................................................................... 93
Operation Panel
................................................................................................................................................. 94
Turning ON the Machine
......................................................................................................................................... 98
Turning OFF the Machine
..................................................................................................................................... 99
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
Using the Operation Panel
Basic Screens
.................................................................................................................................... 102
................................................................................................................................................... 103
Home Screen
............................................................................................................................................. 104
............................................................................................................................. 107
<Status Monitor> Screen
Message Display
Basic Operation
Entering Text
......................................................................................................................................... 110
................................................................................................................................................ 111
................................................................................................................................................... 116
Logging in to the Machine
Loading Paper
...................................................................................................................... 100
..................................................................................................................................... 120
....................................................................................................................................................... 121
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
.................................................................................................................... 123
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Loading Envelopes
............................................................................................................. 128
............................................................................................................................................ 131
Loading Preprinted Paper
.................................................................................................................................. 133
Specifying Paper Size and Type
.......................................................................................................................... 137
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
....................................................................................... 138
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray
................................................................................ 140
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray
Registering a Custom Paper Size
......................................................................... 142
.................................................................................................................. 144
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
................................................................................................................ 146
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function
Customizing the Display
........................................................................................................................................ 149
Customizing the Home Screen
........................................................................................................................... 150
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
Setting Sounds
............................................................ 147
.......................................................................................................... 152
...................................................................................................................................................... 153
Entering Sleep Mode
............................................................................................................................................. 154
Using a USB Memory Device
.................................................................................................................................. 156
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 159
Printing from a Computer
Canceling Prints
..................................................................................................................................... 160
............................................................................................................................................... 162
Checking the Printing Status and Log
Various Printing Methods
.................................................................................................................. 165
...................................................................................................................................... 167
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
Printing via Secure Print
............................................................................................ 168
.............................................................................................................................. 169
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing
.................................................................................... 173
............................................................................................................................. 181
II
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 185
Connecting with Mobile Devices
............................................................................................................................ 186
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
............................................................................................................. 189
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
........................................................................................................... 193
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
Using AirPrint
........................................................................................ 187
....................................................................................................................................................... 194
Printing with AirPrint
........................................................................................................................................ 199
................................................................................................................................. 202
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
Using Google Cloud Print
....................................................................................................................................... 203
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
....................................................................................................... 205
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................
Setting Access Privileges
....................................................................................................................................... 209
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN
.............................................................................................................. 210
Setting the Department ID Management
Setting a Remote UI PIN
............................................................................................................. 212
.................................................................................................................................... 218
Configuring the Network Security Settings
............................................................................................................ 220
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
..................................................................................................... 222
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
.................................................................................................. 223
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
Changing Port Numbers
Setting a Proxy
.............................................................................................. 226
.................................................................................................................................... 229
................................................................................................................................................. 230
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
.......................................................................................................... 232
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Configuring IPSec Settings
Restricting the Machine's Functions
.................................................................................................. 250
...................................................................................................................... 254
Restricting Printing from a Computer
.................................................................................................................. 255
.................................................................................................................................. 256
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
......................................................................................................................... 257
......................................................................................................................................... 258
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
Starting Remote UI
...................................................................... 241
................................................................................................................................. 243
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
Restricting USB Functions
...................................................................... 235
................................................................................... 238
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
............................................................................................ 259
........................................................................................................................................... 260
Checking the Status and Logs
............................................................................................................................ 263
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
Security Policy
207
........................................................................................................... 269
.................................................................................................................................................. 272
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data
Updating the Firmware
Initializing Settings
................................................................................................................. 277
......................................................................................................................................... 280
............................................................................................................................................... 283
III
Setting Menu List ......................................................................................................................................
<Preferences>
....................................................................................................................................................... 287
<Display Settings>
............................................................................................................................................ 288
<English Keyboard Layout>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Network>
<Accessibility>
................................................................................................................................... 293
.......................................................................................................................................... 319
.................................................................................................................................................. 320
............................................................................................................................................ 323
<Volume Settings>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>
.................................................................................................................................. 325
..................................................................................................................................... 326
<Adjust Image Quality>
................................................................................................................................................ 333
<Function Settings>
<Common>
................................................................................................................................ 292
....................................................................................................................................................... 299
<External Interface>
<Printer>
286
.............................................................................................................................................. 334
...................................................................................................................................................... 335
......................................................................................................................................................... 338
<Receive>
........................................................................................................................................................ 365
<Access Files>
.................................................................................................................................................. 367
<Secure Print>
.................................................................................................................................................. 371
<Management Settings>
....................................................................................................................................... 372
........................................................................................................................................ 373
<User Management>
<Device Management>
...................................................................................................................................... 375
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
........................................................................................................................................ 380
<Data Management>
<Security Settings>
..................................................................................... 378
........................................................................................................................................... 382
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................
Regular Cleaning
385
.................................................................................................................................................. 387
........................................................................................................................................ 388
Cleaning the Exterior
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
............................................................................................................................. 389
............................................................................................................................... 390
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
Relocating the Machine
.................................................................................................. 394
......................................................................................................................................... 395
Adjusting Image Quality
....................................................................................................................................... 397
Adjusting Print Density
...................................................................................................................................... 398
Adjusting Print Position
..................................................................................................................................... 399
Viewing the Counter Value
.................................................................................................................................... 401
Printing Reports and Lists
Consumables
..................................................................................................................................... 402
........................................................................................................................................................ 406
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 409
Common Problems
................................................................................................................................................ 411
Installation/Settings Problems
Printing Problems
........................................................................................................................... 412
............................................................................................................................................. 416
IV
When You Cannot Print Properly
............................................................................................................................ 419
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
Paper Creases or Curls
................................................................................................................... 421
...................................................................................................................................... 432
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
..................................................................................................................................... 434
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed
Countermeasures for Each Message
................................................................................................................... 436
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
Clearing Paper Jams
.................................................................... 435
................................................................................................................ 449
.............................................................................................................................................. 454
Paper Jams in the Main Unit
............................................................................................................................... 456
............................................................................................................................. 462
Paper Jams in a Paper Source
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
......................................................................................................................... 464
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 466
Third Party Software
Feature Highlights
............................................................................................................................................. 468
................................................................................................................................................ 469
Going Green and Saving Money
Improving Efficiency
So Much More
Specifications
Main Unit
......................................................................................................................................... 471
.................................................................................................................................................. 472
....................................................................................................................................................... 474
........................................................................................................................................................ 475
Available Paper
................................................................................................................................................ 478
Cassette Feeding Module-AH
Printer Functions
............................................................................................................................. 481
.............................................................................................................................................. 482
Management Functions
..................................................................................................................................... 484
......................................................................................................................................... 486
System Environment
Network Environment
Options
....................................................................................................................................... 487
................................................................................................................................................................ 488
Optional Equipment
System Options
.......................................................................................................................................... 489
................................................................................................................................................ 490
Manuals and Their Contents
Using User's Guide
.................................................................................................................................. 492
................................................................................................................................................ 493
Screen Layout of User's Guide
Viewing User's Guide
............................................................................................................................ 494
........................................................................................................................................ 497
Basic Windows Operations
Notice
......................................................................................................................... 470
.................................................................................................................................... 499
.................................................................................................................................................................. 506
V
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
1
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
2822-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Installation(P. 3)
Power Supply(P. 5)
Handling(P. 6)
Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Consumables(P. 10)
2
Important Safety Instructions
Installation
2822-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a fire or electrical shock
● A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, sofas, rugs, or similar objects)
● A damp or dusty location
● A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
● A location subject to high temperatures
● A location exposed to open flames
● Near alcohol, paint thinners or other flammable substances
Other warnings
● Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers filled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not use near medical equipment. Radio waves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical
equipment, which may result in malfunctions and accidents.
● When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
● If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
● The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
- An unstable location
- A location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
● When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
● When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the floor or
walls. Doing so may result in injury.
3
Important Safety Instructions
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
● This machine generates a slight amount of ozone and other emissions during normal use. These emissions
are not harmful to health. However, they may be noticeable during extended use or long production runs in
poorly ventilated rooms. To maintain a comfortable working environment, it is recommended that the room
where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated. Also avoid locations where people would be
exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
● A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
● A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
● A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
● A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
● A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
● Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
4
Important Safety Instructions
Power Supply
2822-002
● Use only a power supply that meets the specified voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
● The machine must be connected to a socket-outlet with grounding connection by the provided power cord.
● Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
● Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
● Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
● Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a fire, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
● Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
● Do not connect the power cord to an uninterruptible power source. Doing so may result in malfunction of or
damage to the machine at power failure.
● If you plug this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
● Do not connect the power cord to the auxiliary AC power outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
● Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
5
Important Safety Instructions
Handling
2822-003
● Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are highvoltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
● Do not use flammable sprays near this machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
● When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
● This machine generates a low level magnetic flux and ultrasonic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
● Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
● For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
● Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
● The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
6
Important Safety Instructions
● Do not carry the machine with any of the paper drawer or optional
cassette feeding module installed. Otherwise, they may fall, resulting in
injury.
Laser beam
● If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
● To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
- Remove the toner cartridge.
- Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
● Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the office.
Other precautions
● Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
● Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
● Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
● Do not touch the contacts (
) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
7
Important Safety Instructions
● To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
8
Important Safety Instructions
Maintenance and Inspections
2822-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting(P. 409) . If the problem cannot
be resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 464) .
● Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a fire if it comes into contact with electricity.
● Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If
these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
● When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
● When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges or the like, be careful not to get any toner on
your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
9
Important Safety Instructions
Consumables
2822-005
● Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or the like in open flames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or
paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or fire.
● If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
● The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic flux. If you are using a cardiac pacemaker and feel
abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician immediately.
● Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
● Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
● Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
● Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
● Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge or the like. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
● When removing the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, pull it out completely but without using excessive
force. Doing otherwise may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
● Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
● Do not touch the toner cartridge memory (
) or the electrical contacts (
). To avoid scratching the
surface of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light, do not open the drum protective shutter (
10
).
Important Safety Instructions
● Except when necessary, do not take out the toner cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
● The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including floppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Storing the toner cartridge
● Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 °C to 35 °C
Storage humidity range: 35 % to 85 % RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
● Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
● When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge in the
original packing material.
● When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
*Even
within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a
difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of
toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
● Locations exposed to open flames
● Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for five minutes or more
● Locations exposed to excessive salty air
● Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
● Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
● Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
● Locations with a large amount of dust
● Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit
toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like
● The repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like for the machine will be available for at least seven (7)
years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
● Save the packing materials for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.
11
Important Safety Instructions
● The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
● After you pull out the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, dispose of it in accordance with the applicable
local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge or the like
● When discarding a toner cartridge or the like, place it in the original packing material to prevent toner from
scattering from inside, and dispose of it in accordance with the applicable local regulations.
12
Setting Up
Setting Up
Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................. 14
Main Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 15
Preparations Required Before Use ..................................................................................................................... 16
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 17
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................... 19
Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 21
Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 23
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 25
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 26
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 29
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 31
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 33
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 36
Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 39
Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 41
Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 44
Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 47
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 50
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 51
Configuring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 54
Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 57
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 60
Configuring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 61
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 63
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 64
Configuring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 65
Configuring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 69
Configuring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 71
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 73
Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 77
Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 81
13
Setting Up
Setting Up
2822-006
Before using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check
the sequences of flow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings. Preparations Required
Before Use(P. 16)
● The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the
machine, see Main Functions(P. 15) and check the available functions.
Configuring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)
● You can easily configure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network
settings, by following the on-screen guidance. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 19)
14
Setting Up
Main Functions
2822-007
This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function
: Without function
Function
Display
LBP215x
LBP214dw
LBP212dw
Touch panel Black and white LCD Black and white LCD
2-sided printing
Memory Media Print
Wireless LAN
Default System Manager ID
7654321
Not specified
Not specified
Default System Manager PIN
7654321
Not specified
Not specified
Application Library
Cassette Feeding Module-AH *
Barcode Printing Kit *
*This
is an optional item.
● For the available driver types, see the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see
the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
● In the User's Guide, when operations differ depending on screens, distinctions are highlighted with the
different descriptions: "touch panel model" and "black and white LCD model."
● When operations are the same for both models, the screens from the touch panel display will be used for
explanation in most cases. The black and white LCD model has screens different from those of the touch
panel model. In either case, follow the on-screen terms to perform operations.
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 497)
15
Setting Up
Preparations Required Before Use
2822-008
Set up the machine following steps 1 to 3 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go
to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check Preventing Unauthorized
Access(P. 17) .
Step 1
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 19)
Step 2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
● Configure the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need
to use the Setup Guide, configure the network settings from here.
Step 3
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
Setting from the Remote UI
● When the network environment settings are complete, you can efficiently set the machine from a computer
using Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
Importing data from another machine to save time
● As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/
multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 277)
16
Setting Up
Preventing Unauthorized Access
2822-009
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 17)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 18)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 18)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 18)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to confirm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
● From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to confirm the IP address, see
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41) .
● If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents
17
Setting Up
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address filter. For information on how to set up an IP address filter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P. 223) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 220) ,
and on the procedures to specify, see Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines
enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
● Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 218) .
● Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Managing the Machine(P. 207) and take necessary security measures for
preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
18
Setting Up
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
2822-00A
1660-009
When the machine is turned on ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 98) ) for the first time, the Setup Guide starts up to
assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the
setting screens are displayed in the following order.
Step 1
Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the
country or region where the machine will be used.
Step 2
1
Select a language.
2
For a Touch panel model, select <Yes>.
3
Select a country or region.
Setting the Date and Time
Adjust the machine's date/time.
1
Select a time zone.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the
world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required
for Internet communications.
2
Enter the date and time, and press <Apply> (
).
Touch panel model
● Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.
Black and white LCD model
● Use
or
to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the
numeric keys.
Step 3
Setting the Access Security Measures
Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine
settings from a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.
● You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.
a Remote UI PIN(P. 218)
Step 4
2
Enter a PIN, and then press <Apply> (
3
Enter the same PIN, and then press <Apply> (
).
).
Setting the Wireless LAN
Configure the settings to connect to the network using the wireless LAN.
19
Setting
Setting Up
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to
step 5.
2
Select <OK>.
3
Select the setting method.
● For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see
Wireless LAN(P. 27) .
Step 5
Connecting to a
Viewing Application Library
The one-touch button referred to as "Application Library" is provided in the Home screen. You
can read the description of each function.
1
To finish the Setup Guide, select <End>.
➠ When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home screen appears.
20
Setting Up
Setting the Date/Time
2822-00C
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the
time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Time Zone(P. 21)
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 21)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 22)
Setting the Time Zone
If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
3
Select the time zone.
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Date/Time Settings>
<Time
Zone>.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC
time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Setting the Current Date and Time
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
3
Enter the date and time.
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Timer/Energy Settings>
21
<Current Date/Time Settings>.
Setting Up
Touch panel model
● Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.
Black and white LCD model
● Use
4
or
to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the numeric keys.
Press <Apply> (
).
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.
<Date Format>(P. 294)
<Time Format>(P. 294)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
1
2
3
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings>
Saving Time Settings>.
<Date/Time Settings>
<Daylight
Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
● When you select <On>, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item. To set
the day, specify "what day of which week."
4
Select <Apply>.
22
Setting Up
Setting Up the Network Environment
2822-00E
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specific IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
● The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
● The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
● For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼ Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
● Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
● Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
● Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication
method or the Ethernet type ( Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 48)
23
Setting Up
● To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see
Authentication Settings(P. 250) .
Configuring IEEE 802.1X
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
● Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Set the IP address as necessary.
● At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specific IP address. Setting IP
Addresses(P. 40)
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 50)
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 60)
24
Setting Up
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
2822-00F
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4
Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
25
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wired LAN
2822-00H
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect a LAN cable.
● Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
● Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2
Wait for several minutes.
➠ The IP address is set automatically.
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
26
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
2822-00J
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), configuring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 27)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 28)
Risk of information leak
● Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
● The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
● The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
◼ Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
27
Setting Up
◼ PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
● If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
◼ Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
◼ Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
28
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
2822-00K
1660-00J
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6
Select <Yes>.
7
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
● The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
● Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 5.
29
Setting Up
8
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
9
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 103)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 300)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
30
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
2822-00L
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
● For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
3
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
6
Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7
Select <Yes>.
➠ The PIN code is generated and shown on the display.
From a Computer
8
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
● Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
31
Setting Up
● The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9
10
Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 103)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 300)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
32
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
2822-00R
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39) ).
Security settings
● If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using <Enter Manually>. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>.
6
Select <Select Access Point>.
➠ The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
● If a message is displayed telling that access point cannot be found, see
Message(P. 436) .
7
Countermeasures for Each
Select a wireless LAN router.
● Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and press <Next> (
33
).
Setting Up
To view details of security settings on the Touch panel model
● Select the wireless LAN router, and select <Details>. To return to the original screen, select
.
If your wireless router is not found
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Settings Problems(P. 412)
8
Installation/
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
9
Entering Text(P. 116) .
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
11
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 103)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 300)
34
Setting Up
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
35
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
2822-00S
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>
6
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
<Enter Manually>.
● Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
7
Entering Text(P. 116) .
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
● If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.
Using WEP
1
Select <WEP>.
2
Select an authentication method.
36
Setting Up
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
● When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3
Select the WEP key you want to edit.
Touch panel model
● Select the WEP key (1 to 4), and select <Edit>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Edit WEP Key>
WEP key (1 to 4).
● Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
4
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
5
Select the desired WEP key.
Touch panel model
● Select the WEP key you have edited, and select <Register>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Select WEP Key>
the WEP key you have edited.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2
Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
37
Setting Up
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
8
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the specified settings are correct, and return to step 5.
9
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
Select <Close>.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or
the Basic Features screen of each function. Basic Screens(P. 103)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 300)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
38
Setting Up
Checking the SSID and Network Key
2822-00U
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID
A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
● Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
● Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
● Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
◼ Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check
them by using the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant." Download the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant"
from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/), and start it up from a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
● If no access point is displayed on the screen after startup of the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant,"
check if the setup is completed both on the computer and the wireless LAN router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
39
Setting Up
Setting IP Addresses
2822-00W
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Configure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly configure the IPv4 address settings.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
40
Setting Up
Setting IPv4 Address
2822-00X
1660-00W
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are firmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26) ). You can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 43)
Setting IPv4 Address
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Configure IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
<IP Address Settings>.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic
addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,
the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select the protocol.
41
Setting Up
Touch panel model
● Select <On> in <Auto Acquire>, and select <Select Protocol>
<DHCP>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Select Protocol>
<DHCP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
● Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time
and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
● If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4
Select <Apply>.
● IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1
Configure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.
Touch panel model
● Select <Auto Acquire>, and select <Off> in <Auto Acquire>
<Apply>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2
Select <Manually Acquire>.
3
Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
Touch panel model
● Enter <IP Address>, <Subnet Mask>, and <Gateway Address>, and select <Apply>.
Black and white LCD model
● Enter these values in each screen using the numeric keys, and press
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
42
.
Setting Up
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 260) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (
Testing the Network Connection(P. 43) ).
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Testing the Network Connection
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and press <Apply> (
<IPv4 Settings>
<PING Command>.
➠ If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
43
).
Setting Up
Setting IPv6 Addresses
2822-00Y
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4
Settings(P. 47) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:
Type
Description
Link-local address
An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address
An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and default
router address.
Stateless address
An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address
An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and configure the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[IPv6 Settings].
44
Setting Up
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Stateless Address 1]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
45
Setting Up
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)(P. 302)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)(P. 306)
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
46
Setting Up
Viewing Network Settings
2822-010
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 47)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 48)
● The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
● Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
● You can print a list of the current network settings.
User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 403)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Status Monitor> (
)
<Network Information>
<IPv4>
Select the setting to view
Check the
)
<Network Information>
<IPv6>
Select the setting to view
Check the
settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Status Monitor> (
settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
➠ The MAC address is displayed.
47
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Setting Up
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Connection Information>/<Wireless LAN Information>.
6
Select the setting to view.
Viewing security information
● To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.
Touch panel model
Select <Security Settings>.
Black and white LCD model
<Security Settings>
Select the displayed security protocol
Select the setting to view
Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen
● <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor> (
).
Touch panel model
<Status Monitor>
<Network Information>
<Network Connection Type>
Select the setting to view
Black and white LCD model
<Network Information>
setting to view
<Network Connection Method>
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
48
<Connection Information>
Select the
Setting Up
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
49
Setting Up
Configuring Settings for Communication with a
Computer
2822-011
Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before configuring the
machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals
for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Setting Up Print Server(P. 57)
● Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and
can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
● Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the
network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.
50
Setting Up
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
2822-012
Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Configure printing protocols.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Configuring LPD or RAW
1
Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings]
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
[Edit].
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set
time, printing is canceled.
3
Click [OK].
51
Setting Up
Configuring WSD
1
Select [WSD Settings]
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
[Edit].
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the
network.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<LPD Settings>(P. 309)
<RAW Settings>(P. 309)
<WSD Settings>(P. 310)
Setting up WSD network devices
● The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the
Printer Folder(P. 499) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For
more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
To change the port number
● The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229)
52
Setting Up
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
53
Setting Up
Configuring Printer Ports
2822-013
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the
computer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
3
Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
[Properties].
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers, add a new port.
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Click [Next].
4
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
● The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
54
Setting Up
● When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*When
you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5
Click [Finish].
6
Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Configuring Printing
Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 229) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
1
Click [Configure Port].
2
Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
● If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
● If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
3
4
Click [OK].
Click [Close].
55
Setting Up
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 57)
56
Setting Up
Setting Up Print Server
2822-014
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it
possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers
on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,
configure the settings for sharing the printer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
● You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
● When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
● "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
2
3
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
● Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.
4
Install additional drivers as necessary.
● This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
57
Setting Up
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
2
Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
● Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server
Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems
[x64]
64-bit operating systems
[x86] under [Processor]
● If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 501) .
3
4
5
Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder
that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
● If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[x64]
● If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[32BIT]
[Driver] folders
[Driver]
Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.
Click [OK].
◼ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1
Locate the shared printer in the print server.
2
Double-click the shared printer.
Print Server(P. 500)
58
Displaying Shared Printers in the
Setting Up
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 160)
59
Setting Up
Configuring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
2822-015
The configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network configurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a configuration to suit your network environment.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
Configuring SMB(P. 69)
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
Other Network Settings(P. 77)
60
Setting Up
Configuring Ethernet Settings
2822-016
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used
without changing the defaults ( <Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 314) ), but you can
change these settings to suit your network environment.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
4
Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
● If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode
and the type that can be used.
Configuring Ethernet settings automatically
Touch panel model
Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.
Black and white LCD model
Select <Auto Detect>
<On>.
Configuring Ethernet settings manually
1
Configure a setting to disable Auto Detect.
Touch panel model
● Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.
Black and white LCD model
● Select <Auto Detect>
2
<Communication Mode>
<Off>.
select the communication mode.
61
Setting Up
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3
<Ethernet Type>
4
Select <Apply>.
select the Ethernet type.
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
62
Setting Up
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
2822-017
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Select the MTU.
5
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
6
Restart the machine.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
<MTU Size>.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
63
Setting Up
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
2822-018
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and
press <Apply> ( ).
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 63)
64
Setting Up
Configuring DNS
2822-019
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Configure DNS settings.
Configuring IPv4 DNS
1
Select [IPv4 Settings]
2
Configure IPv4 DNS settings.
[Edit].
65
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Setting Up
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
66
Setting Up
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
Configuring IPv6 DNS
1
Select [IPv6 Settings]
2
Configure IPv6 DNS settings.
[Edit].
● The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
67
Setting Up
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)(P. 302)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)(P. 306)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
68
Setting Up
Configuring SMB
2822-01A
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and
printers, among multiple devices on a network. You need to use it to configure the
machine as a shared printer on an SMB network. Depending on your network, you may
have to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.
NetBIOS Name
In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected
computers as well as for file sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as
the NetBIOS name.
Workgroup Name
Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as file
sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the
machine belongs to.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[SMB Settings].
69
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Setting Up
[NetBIOS Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
● NetBIOS names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk (*) cannot be registered to a WINS server.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring WINS(P. 71)
70
Setting Up
Configuring WINS
2822-01C
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specified.
● In order to specify WINS server settings, NetBIOS name and workgroup name are required to be set.
Configuring SMB(P. 69)
● The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[WINS Settings].
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
71
Setting Up
● If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● WINS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
72
<WINS Settings>(P. 309)
Setting Up
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
2822-01E
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3 ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 232) ).
● The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP.
● To change the port number of SNMP, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229) .
● SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to configure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
[SNMP Settings].
73
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Setting Up
5
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access
Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
74
Setting Up
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security
Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate
encryption algorithm for your network environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password
in the [Confirm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
7
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
75
Setting Up
● With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8
Click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Disabling SNMPv1
● If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
● You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>.
<SNMP Settings>(P. 311)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
● If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
76
Setting Up
Other Network Settings
2822-01F
Configure the following items according to your network environment.
Configuring SNTP(P. 77)
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 78)
Configuring SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.
If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specified intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be
maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before
configuring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 21) ). SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.
● The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[SNTP Settings].
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
77
Setting Up
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
● You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network
Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is
displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as iW Management Console*, into the network. Information such as device
settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a
network, iW Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location
Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status information. SLP settings can be
specified via the Remote UI. This section also describes the procedure to configure settings for communication
between the machine and plug-ins for iW Management Console.
*For
more information about iW Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
To use iW Management Console plug-ins
● You need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set
[MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 313)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
Remote UI Operations
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
78
Setting Up
◼ Configuring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Specify SLP settings.
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Specifying multicast device discovery
1
Select [Multicast Discovery Settings]
2
Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Edit].
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software.
● To change the port number for multicast discovery, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229) .
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specific scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.
3
Click [OK].
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1
Select [Sleep Mode Notification Settings]
2
Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
[Edit].
79
Setting Up
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notification packets can pass through.
[Notification Interval]
Specify how often the machine notifies a device management software of its power status.
3
5
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
◼ Configuring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins
You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and iW Management Console plug-ins.
Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine's settings from iW Management Console.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Management On/Off>
<Network>
<On>
80
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings
Setting Up
Installing Drivers
2822-01H
Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.
1
Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.
● Install the optional devices on the main unit in advance.
Optional Equipment(P. 489)
● If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the
computer.
● You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/).
● When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.
You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.
● Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.
● Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported
status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.
2
Proceed with the installation.
● For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are
going to use.
● Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall
Settings]. For more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 223) .
● If sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by
[Firewall Settings], it is no longer possible to perform printing from that computer.
81
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 84
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 87
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 88
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 90
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 91
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 93
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 94
Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 98
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 99
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ................................................................................................................ 100
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 102
Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 103
Home Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 104
<Status Monitor> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 107
Message Display .................................................................................................................................... 110
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 111
Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................ 116
Logging in to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 120
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 121
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 123
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 128
Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 131
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 133
Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 137
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................. 138
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 140
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................. 142
Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 144
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 146
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................... 147
Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 149
Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 150
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 152
Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 153
82
Basic Operations
Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 154
Using a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................................................. 156
83
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
2822-01J
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼ Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 87)
◼ Turning ON the Machine
This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 98)
◼ Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes
how to enter characters and numbers. Using the Operation Panel(P. 102)
◼ Logging in to the Machine
This section describes how to log in when a login screen is displayed.
84
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Basic Operations
◼ Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
◼ Customizing the Display
This section describes how to rearrange the displayed items in order to make it easier to use screens shown in the
display. Customizing the Display(P. 149)
◼ Changing the Default Settings for Functions
This section describes how to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.
Default Settings for Functions(P. 152)
Changing the
◼ Setting Sounds
This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when an error
occurs. Setting Sounds(P. 153)
85
Basic Operations
◼ Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes how to set the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
◼ Using a USB Memory Device
This section describes about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device.
Using a USB Memory Device(P. 156)
86
Basic Operations
Parts and Their Functions
2822-01K
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 88)
Back Side(P. 90)
Interior(P. 91)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 92)
Paper Drawer(P. 93)
Operation Panel(P. 94)
87
Basic Operations
Front Side
2822-01L
USB port (for USB device connection)
Use this port to connect a third-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory
device allows you to print data from the memory device.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine.
Relocating the Machine(P. 395)
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
Multi-purpose tray
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing the toner cartridge or clearing paper jams.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.
88
Basic Operations
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer.
Drawer(P. 123)
Loading Paper in the Paper
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can
perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.
Operation Panel(P. 94)
Basic Screens(P. 103)
89
Basic Operations
Back Side
2822-01S
Rear cover
Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.
Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 464)
When a
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
USB port (for USB device connection)
Use this port to connect devices such as a third-party USB keyboard.
USB port (for computer connection)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc.
LAN(P. 26)
90
Connecting to a Wired
Basic Operations
Interior
2822-01U
Transport guide (at the back)
If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide toward the front of the machine to
remove the jammed paper. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Transport guide (at the front)
If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide toward the back of the machine to
remove the jammed paper. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Duplex transport guide
If paper has jammed during 2-sided printing, lower the duplex transport guide to remove the jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
91
Basic Operations
Multi-Purpose Tray
2822-01W
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release lever that is indicated with an arrow in the illustration to release the lock and
slide the paper guides.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.
Tray extension
Open the tray extension when loading large paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
92
Basic Operations
Paper Drawer
2822-01X
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Paper level indicator
Indicates the remaining amount of paper. The mark moves downward as the remaining amount of paper
decreases.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
93
Basic Operations
Operation Panel
2822-08C
Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model(P. 94)
Operation Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 95)
Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model
● The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted. Adjust it to an angle that is most comfortable for
viewing the panel. Adjusting the Angle(P. 95)
Display
You can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can
specify settings by touching the screen directly.
Basic Screens(P. 103)
Basic Operation(P. 111)
Sound Volume key
Press to adjust volume.
Setting Sounds(P. 153)
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into the sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in the sleep
mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
Data indicator
Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there
are documents waiting to be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
94
Basic Operations
Home key
Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Memory
Media Print and Secure Print.
Home Screen(P. 104)
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 150)
Stop key
Press to cancel printing and other operations.
Adjusting the Angle
When it is difficult to view the touch panel display, adjust the angle of the operation panel.
Operation Panel of Black and White LCD Model
Display
You can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridges,
and other conditions. Basic Screens(P. 103)
Home key
Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Secure
Print. Home Screen(P. 104)
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
95
Basic Operations
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text.
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model(P. 117)
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Data indicator
Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there
are documents waiting to be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press
the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
Status Monitor key
Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP
address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amount of
paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred. <Status
Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 108)
[ID] key
Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you finish
using the machine, press this key again to log off. Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Clear key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Stop key
Press to cancel printing and other operations.
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the left.
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to increase a value.
96
Basic Operations
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the right.
[
] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
[
] key
Press to apply settings or specified details.
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 111)
97
Basic Operations
Turning ON the Machine
2822-020
This section describes how to turn ON the machine.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into a power outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
➠ The Start screen appears.
Operation Panel(P. 94)
● You can select the screen that is displayed first after the machine is turned ON.
Startup/Restoration>(P. 288)
LINKS
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 99)
98
<Default Screen After
Basic Operations
Turning OFF the Machine
2822-021
This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.
1
Press the power switch.
● It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
● To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.
● You can specify the time for each day of the week and configure a setting to automatically turn OFF the
machine. Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 100)
99
Basic Operations
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
2822-022
You can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specified time on each day of the week. This
allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this
function is disabled.
● For information about the basic operation to set up the machine from Remote UI, see
Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Timer Settings]
4
Setting Up Menu
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Edit].
Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn
OFF the power.
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Selecting the check box allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
100
Basic Operations
Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time field blank means
that the auto shutdown function is disabled for that day.
5
Click [OK].
If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specified time*
● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the menu screen or Check Counter screen is displayed
● When settings data is being imported/exported
● When the firmware is being updated
*If
the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specified time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals
of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.
101
Basic Operations
Using the Operation Panel
2822-023
You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to configure machine settings or operate functions. This
section describes basic usage of the display and keys.
Basic Screens(P. 103)
Basic Operation(P. 111)
Entering Text(P. 116)
● If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display:
● If you want to adjust the brightness of the display:
● If you want to adjust the contrast of the display:
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 320)
<Brightness>(P. 320)
<Contrast>(P. 321)
LINKS
Operation Panel(P. 94)
102
Basic Operations
Basic Screens
2822-024
The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as Memory Media
Print and Secure Print. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's
operation status. To operate the touch panel model, directly touch the display.
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 107)
Message Display(P. 110)
● You can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the
respective functions. Customizing the Display(P. 149)
To Know How to Operate
● On some screens, the <?> button allows you to view the descriptions of functions or how to operate.
103
Basic Operations
Home Screen
2822-025
The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing
to specify settings for and register functions.
on the operation panel. Use this screen
Home Screen of Touch Panel Model(P. 104)
Home Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 105)
Home Screen of Touch Panel Model
Change page
Use this to view another page in the Home screen. You
can also flick sideways to change pages.
Amount remaining in the toner cartridges
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges in
stages.
<Check Counter>
Displays the total volume of printouts.
Counter Value(P. 401)
Viewing the
<Log Out>
Use this button to log out from the machine.
<Status Monitor>
Press to check the printing status, to view the usage
history, or to view the network settings such as the IP
address of the machine. You can also check the status of
the machine, such as the remaining amount of paper and
the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether
any errors that occurred. <Status Monitor>
Screen(P. 107)
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless
LAN.
104
Basic Operations
<Memory Media Print>
Prints files stored in a USB memory device. Printing
from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
(P. 173)
<Secure Print>
Use this function to print a secure document. Printing
a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other
machine settings start from this button. Setting Menu
List(P. 286)
<Paper Settings>
This button is used for specifying the size and type of
paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Application Library button
You can use these buttons to conveniently perform a
function by a one-touch operation. For more information,
see the manual for Application Library on the online
manual website.
<Mobile Portal>
Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 186)
<Home Screen Settings>
Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons
are displayed in. Customizing the Home
Screen(P. 150)
<Update Firmware>
Allows you to update the firmware via the Internet.
Updating the Firmware(P. 280)
Home Screen of Black and White LCD Model
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless
LAN.
Amount remaining in the toner cartridges
105
Basic Operations
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges in
stages. This is hidden while the Home screen is active.
<Menu>
<Function Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other
machine settings start from this button. Setting Menu
List(P. 286)
<Paper Settings>
This button is used for specifying the size and type of
paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
<Secure Print>
Use this function to print a secure document. Printing
a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168)
<Mobile Portal>
Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 186)
<Display Order (Home)>
Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons
are displayed in. Customizing the Home
Screen(P. 150)
LINKS
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 150)
106
Basic Operations
<Status Monitor> Screen
2822-026
), a screen appears in which you can check the progress of document processing
When you press <Status Monitor> (
as well as the status of the machine (the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges, etc.) and network settings
such as the machine's IP address.
<Status Monitor> Screen of Touch Panel Model(P. 107)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model(P. 108)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Touch Panel Model
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 436)
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount of paper or the amount of toner remaining in the
toner cartridges.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Cartridge Information>
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of
their lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168)
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
107
Printing a
Basic Operations
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Status and logs of printed and received documents
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Print Job> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
<Rmv. Mem. Media>
Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is connected
to the machine. Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 156)
<Status Monitor> Screen of Black and White LCD Model
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 436)
<Device Status>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount of paper or the amount of toner remaining in the
toner cartridges.
108
Basic Operations
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of
their lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Remove Memory Media>
Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is
connected to the machine. Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 156)
<Check Counter>
Displays the total volume of printouts.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 401)
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168)
Printing a
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Status and logs of printed and received documents
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Print Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
109
Basic Operations
Message Display
2822-027
Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner
cartridge lifetime is reached. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 436)
Touch panel model
Black and white LCD model
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the onscreen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example.
Touch panel model
Black and white LCD model
110
Basic Operations
Basic Operation
2822-08E
Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model(P. 111)
Basic Operation of Black and White LCD Model(P. 113)
Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model
The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.
Avoid the following actions.
● The display may malfunction or be damaged.
- Pressing forcefully
- Pressing with pointed objects (fingernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
- Operating with wet/soiled hands
- Operating the display while an object is placed on it
● Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
Tap
Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or finalizing items.
Flick
Flick with the finger on the display. The effect of flicking varies depending on the screen. For instance, flicking in
the Home screen moves you one page in the direction of the flick.
111
Basic Operations
◼ Selecting Items
Tap an item name or button to make a selection.
If an item is mistakenly touched
● Slide your finger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.
To return to the previous screen
● Tap
to return to the previous screen.
◼ Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed,
flick the screen to scroll in the direction of the flick. Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being
touched.
112
Basic Operations
◼ Changing the Setting Value
Tap <+>/<-> to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by flicking the slider left or right.
● You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:
Settings>(P. 288)
<Display
● You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified
length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 296)
● You can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness:
<Accessibility>(P. 320)
Basic Operation of Black and White LCD Model
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using
/
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information fits on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use
/
to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
113
Basic Operations
Changing Setting Values
/
to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can
Use
enter values directly using the numeric keys. Entering Text(P. 116)
● Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
/
Using
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press
to proceed to the next screen. Press
to return to the previous screen.
● You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing
, and return to the previous screen by pressing
.
Changing Setting Values
Use
/
to adjust the slider scale.
Moving the Cursor
Use
/
to enter text and values.
Entering Text(P. 116)
Using
Press
to apply a setting.
Using the Numeric Keys
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Entering Text(P. 116)
114
Basic Operations
● You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:
Settings>(P. 288)
<Display
● You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified
length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 296)
● You can change a variety of accessibility-related settings, such as the scroll speed:
115
<Accessibility>(P. 320)
Basic Operations
Entering Text
2822-029
Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model(P. 116)
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model(P. 117)
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard(P. 119)
Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model
When entering text or a number, use the keyboard displayed on the screen. The numeric keys are displayed on the
screen to enter only numbers.
Switching the Type of Character
Tap <a> or <1/#> to switch the type of character that is entered.
● To enter upper case characters, tap
.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time
characters.
is tapped. Holding down
allows you to delete successive
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Tap
or
to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap
.
When the Numeric Keys are Displayed
When you are supposed to enter only a numeric value, the numeric keys are displayed on the screen. Tap
numeric keys to enter the numeric value.
116
Basic Operations
Value range
● The values in ( ) displayed the entry box are the enterable value range.
When buttons other than the numeric keys are displayed
● When <+>/<-> or
/
are displayed, you can tap the buttons to increase or decrease the numeric
value or move the cursor.
Entering Text on the Black and White LCD Model
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Press
to switch the type of text that is entered.
● You can also select <Entry Mode> and press
to switch the type of text.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key
A
a
@.-_/
12
1
ABC
abc
2
DEF
def
3
117
Basic Operations
GHI
ghi
4
JKL
jkl
5
MNO
mno
6
PQRS
pqrs
7
TUV
tuv
8
WXYZ
wxyz
9
(Not available)
0
(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)
● Press
or select <Symbol> and press
when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to
display enterable symbols in the screen. Use
and press
/
/
/
to select the symbol you want to enter,
.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time
is pressed. Press and hold
to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Press
or
to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon-1"
1
Press
repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2
Press
repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3
Press
repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4
Press
repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5
Press
repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6
Press
repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7
Press
repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8
Press
repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.
9
Press
repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10
Press
.
11
Select <Apply> and press
.
118
.
Basic Operations
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard
You can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the
Front Side(P. 88) or Back Side(P. 90) and
enter text from the keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.
● Some keys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When
keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.
● To delete text, press the [Delete] key.
● Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.
● You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout).
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 292)
● You can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to
disconnect it.
● Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.
● The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.
119
Basic Operations
Logging in to the Machine
2822-02A
If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log in before using the
machine. When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.
1
Enter the ID.
1
Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.
2
Enter the ID.
● If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.
2
Enter the PIN.
1
Select <PIN>.
2
Enter the PIN.
3
Press <Log In> (
).
➠ The login screen will be changed to the Home screen.
● After you finish using the machine, press <Log Out> (
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 212)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
120
) to display the login screen.
Basic Operations
Loading Paper
2822-02C
You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper(P. 478) for
available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 121)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 122)
How to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Loading Envelopes(P. 131)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 133)
Configuring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
● A paper jam or printing error may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
● Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
121
Basic Operations
Paper handling and storage
● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a flat surface.
● Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
● Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
● Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
● Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from fixing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.
◼ How to Store the Printed Paper
● Store on a flat surface.
● Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
● Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
● To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
● When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
● Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼ Precautions When Applying Adhesive
● Always use insoluble adhesive.
● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
● When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 144)
122
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
2822-02E
1660-02Y
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 123)
Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 125)
● When loading A5 size paper in the paper drawer of the main unit, see
Paper(P. 125) .
Loading Custom Size
● When you want to load A5 size paper in the optional cassette feeding module in the landscape orientation,
see Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 123) . If you want to use the portrait orientation, load paper by
following the procedure for Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 125) .
● When using A6 size paper, see
Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 125) and load it in the portrait orientation.
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
● Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional cassette feeding module.
Loading Regular Size Paper
To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For
paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 125) .
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
123
Basic Operations
● Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
● While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate paper
size marking.
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide
on the rear side of the paper drawer.
● Load the paper with the print side face down.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
● When loading paper with a logo, see
4
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 133) .
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
● When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen
is displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 377)
124
Basic Operations
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 138)
When changing the paper size or type
● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer with the print side face down or into the multi-purpose tray (
Purpose Tray(P. 128) ) with the print side face up.
Loading Paper in the Multi-
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 327)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
Loading Custom Size Paper
To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use
the following procedure.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
● Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
125
Basic Operations
3
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the front side of
the paper drawer.
● Load the paper with the print side face down.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
● When loading paper with a logo, see
4
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 133) .
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
126
Basic Operations
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
● When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen
is displayed.
»
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 377)
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 138)
When changing the paper size or type
● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer with the print side face down or into the multi-purpose tray (
Purpose Tray(P. 128) ) with the print side face up.
Loading Paper in the Multi-
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 327)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 478)
127
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
2822-02F
1660-030
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
● The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose
tray. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
When loading A5/A6 size paper
● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation.
the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 140)
● When using A6 size paper, load it in the portrait orientation.
Landscape orientation
1
Portrait orientation
Open the cover.
● Hold the left and right side handles, and open the cover.
2
Pull out the paper tray and the tray extension.
● Pull out the tray extension when loading large paper.
128
Specifying Paper Size and Type in
Basic Operations
3
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
4
Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper
● Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide (
). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Paper(P. 133) .
129
Loading Envelopes(P. 131) or
Loading Preprinted
Basic Operations
5
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 140)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
paper drawer ( Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123) ) with the print side face down or into the
multi-purpose tray with the print side face up.
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 327)
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 478)
130
Basic Operations
Loading Envelopes
2822-02H
Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up. You cannot load envelopes in the paper drawer.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 131)
In the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 132)
● This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1
2
Close the flap of each envelope.
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
3
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls.
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.
131
Basic Operations
In the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),
with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
132
Basic Operations
Loading Preprinted Paper
2822-02J
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 133)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 135)
● This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123) or
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128) .
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
133
Basic Operations
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
134
Basic Operations
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.
135
Basic Operations
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting
● When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,
the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be
used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided
printing. <Switch Paper Feed Method>(P. 336)
136
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type
2822-02K
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 138)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 140)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 142)
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 144)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 146)
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 147)
● If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
137
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
2822-02L
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select the target paper drawer.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
Touch panel model
3
Black and white LCD model
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper (Touch panel model)
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 144)
3
Select <Apply>.
138
Basic Operations
When loading A5 size paper
● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.
Landscape orientation
Portrait orientation
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Action When Free Paper
Size Mismatch>(P. 338)
4
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
● The machine operates based on the paper type setting in the printer driver.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 146)
Available Paper(P. 478)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 377)
139
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
2822-02R
The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions
to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded
● If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can skip the paper setting operations by
registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,
the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 142) ).
1
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
140
Basic Operations
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 144)
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
3
Select <Apply>.
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Action When Free Paper
Size Mismatch>(P. 338)
2
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
● The machine operates based on the paper type setting in the printer driver.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 146)
Available Paper(P. 478)
141
Basic Operations
Registering Default Paper Settings for the MultiPurpose Tray
2822-02S
You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the
effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.
● After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,
and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper
settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in
step 3, and then load the paper.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select multi-purpose tray.
Touch panel model
3
Home Screen(P. 104)
Black and white LCD model
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
Registering a custom paper size
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
142
Basic Operations
● If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with
one touch. Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 144)
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
3
Select <Apply>.
About <Free Size>
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the loaded paper. <Action When Free Paper
Size Mismatch>(P. 338)
4
Select the paper type.
About <Free>
● The machine operates based on the paper type setting in the printer driver.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 146)
Available Paper(P. 478)
143
Basic Operations
Registering a Custom Paper Size
2822-02U
You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Register Custom Paper>.
3
Select the registration number.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● On the black and white LCD model, if you have selected the registered number, continue on to select <Edit>.
Deleting a setting
● Select <Delete>
4
<Yes>.
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
Touch panel model
● Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using the numeric keys.
Black and white LCD model
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the paper width
<Y>
enter the paper
length
5
Select <Apply>.
6
On the black and white LCD model, continue on to select the paper type.
144
Basic Operations
About <Free>
● The machine operates based on the paper type setting in the printer driver.
Setting to the registered custom size
Touch panel model
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above can be called when <Custom> is selected on the
paper size selection screen for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Black and white LCD model
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above are displayed on the paper size selection screen
for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Example for multi-purpose tray:
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
145
Basic Operations
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
2822-02W
You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3
Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
4
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
● Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
● Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting
selection screen.
5
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 138)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 140)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 142)
146
Basic Operations
Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source
for Each Function
2822-02X
Enable or disable the automatic paper source selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the
machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also,
when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that
paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Function Settings>
3
Select <Paper Source Auto Selection>/<Drawer Auto Selection On/Off>.
4
Select the target function.
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Common>
<Paper Feed Settings>.
● When the target function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.
5
For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source
selection feature, specify <On>.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
Touch panel model
For each target paper source, select <On>.
Black and white LCD model
Select the target paper source
<On>.
● Always specify <On> for at least one of the paper drawers. If you select <Off> for all the drawers, then you
cannot finish the setting procedure.
147
Basic Operations
6
Select <Apply>.
148
Basic Operations
Customizing the Display
2822-02Y
In order to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can rearrange the displayed items and customize the screen to make it easier to select functions.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 150)
149
Basic Operations
Customizing the Home Screen
2822-030
You can change the item display order to make it easier to access the Home screen, and customize the Home screen.
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons (Touch Panel Model)(P. 150)
Changing the Item Display Order (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 151)
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons (Touch Panel Model)
To make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. You can also insert a blank (space)
instead of a button to make it easier to view the Home screen.
1
Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
2
Select <Set Display Order>.
3
Select the button to move.
Home Screen(P. 104)
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
● The selected button is highlighted. Tap the selected button again to deselect it.
4
Select <Move Left> or <Move Right>.
● The button moves as many times as you tapped.
● A long touch on <Move Left> or <Move Right> moves the selected button continuously.
Inserting a blank
● When <Insert Blank> is selected, a blank is inserted on the left side of the selected button.
● If the button at the end is selected, a blank is inserted even if <Move Right> is selected.
Deleting a blank
● Select the blank to be deleted, and select <Del. Blank>.
5
Select <Apply>.
150
Basic Operations
Changing the Item Display Order (Black and White LCD Model)
To make the buttons easier to use, you can freely change the item display order.
1
Select <Display Order (Home)> in the Home screen.
2
Use
/
to select the item to be moved, and press
.
3
Use
/
to move to the target position, and press
.
4
When the buttons are rearranged in the way you want, press
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 111)
151
Home Screen(P. 104)
.
Basic Operations
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
2822-031
The default settings are the settings that are displayed when you turn ON the machine. If you change these default
settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same settings
every time you perform an action.
◼ Memory Media Print
For information about changeable setting items, see
<Access Stored Files Settings>(P. 367) .
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> <Access Stored
Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change
the default value of the selected item
<Apply>
● If you select <Initialize> on each setting screen, you can restore the default settings.
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
152
Basic Operations
Setting Sounds
2822-032
The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when a paper jam or error occurs. You can set the
volume of each of these sounds individually.
1
Displaying the <Volume Settings> screen.
Touch panel model
Press
(
).
Black and white LCD model
Select <Menu>
2
<Preferences>
<Volume Settings>.
Select a setting.
Setting
<Entry Tone>
Description
Confirmation sound each time a key on the
operation panel or button on the display is
pressed
<Invalid Entry Tone>
Sound produced when an invalid key operation
is performed, such as when you enter a
number outside the valid setting range
<Restock Supplies Tone>
Sound produced when a toner cartridge is
almost empty
<Warning Tone>
Sound produced when a paper jam or other
error occurs
<Job Done Tone>
Sound produced when an operation such as
printing is complete
<Energy Saver Alert>
Sound produced when the machine enters or
exits sleep mode
153
Action
Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off>
(not produce a tone).
Basic Operations
Entering Sleep Mode
2822-033
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
on the operation panel.
save power simply by pressing
When in sleep mode
● When the machine enters sleep mode,
lights up yellow green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
● When the machine is in operation
● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
● When a paper jam occurs
● When the menu screen is displayed
● When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
● When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed
● When settings are being imported or exported
Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value
Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a
specified length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer/Energy
Settings>(P. 293) ) to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the
machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Sleep Time>
time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode
Set the amount of
<Apply> (
)
Changing the Sleep Mode Setting to the Specified Time
You can configure a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specified time. You can also
configure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specified time.
154
Basic Operations
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Mode Exit Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep
Select <On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Mode Exit Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<On>
Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep
Enter the time
Exiting Sleep Mode
You can press
or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.
● For the touch panel model, you can also tap the display to exit sleep mode.
155
Basic Operations
Using a USB Memory Device
2822-01R
When using a USB memory, insert it into the USB port on the machine.
Before using a USB memory device
● The supported formats of USB memory device are FAT16 and FAT32.
The following devices and uses are not supported:
● USB memory devices that have security functions installed
● USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards
● Memory card readers connected via USB
● USB memory devices that are used with extension cables
● USB memory devices used via a USB hub
Handling of USB memory devices
● Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in
incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.
● Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.
Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.
● You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.
◼ Remove the USB Memory Device
● Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove
USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.
Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Rmv. Mem. Media>.
➠ Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
3
Disconnect the USB memory device.
156
Basic Operations
Black and White LCD Model
1
Press
2
Select <Device Status>.
3
Select <Remove Memory Media>.
.
➠ Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
4
Disconnect the USB memory device.
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
157
Printing
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 159
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 160
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 162
Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 165
Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 167
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................... 168
Printing via Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 169
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ......................................................................... 173
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing ....................................................................................................................... 181
158
Printing
Printing
2822-034
There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer
driver or print image files from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.
◼ Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.
Printing from a Computer(P. 160)
◼ Useful Functions When Printing
You can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print files stored in a USB memory device.
Various Printing Methods(P. 167)
Printing from Mobile Devices
● Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 185)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
159
Printing
Printing from a Computer
2822-035
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the
online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 160)
To Use the Optional Items(P. 160)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
To Use the Optional Items
If the optional cassette feeding module is attached to the machine after installation of the printer driver, perform the
following operation on the printer driver.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer Properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Paper
Source] Select [1-Cassette Feeding Unit] in [Optional Drawer/Cassette] [OK] [OK]
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
● Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing.
160
Printing
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab according to the settings.
4
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, see
Canceling Prints(P. 162) .
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 165)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 505)
161
Printing
Canceling Prints
2822-036
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 162)
From the Operation Panel(P. 163)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
● Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]
3
Click [Yes].
[Cancel].
➠ Printing of the selected document is canceled.
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
● You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:
Documents(P. 263)
Checking Current Status of Print
Canceling from an application
● On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
162
Printing
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using
◼ Press
or <Status Monitor> (
).
to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When
Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel>
is Pressed
<Yes>.
◼ Check the Print Job Status Before Canceling
Touch Panel Model
<Status Monitor>
<Yes>
<Print Job>
Select the document in the <Print Job Status> tab
Black and White LCD Model
<Print Job>
<Job Status>
Select the document
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
163
<Cancel>
<Yes>
<Cancel>
Printing
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 165)
164
Printing
Checking the Printing Status and Log
2822-037
You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
● When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs.
<Display Job Log>(P. 376)
Useful in the Following Cases
● When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
● When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Press <Status Monitor> (
2
Select <Print Job>.
3
Check the print statuses and logs.
).
To check the print statuses
1
<Print Job Status> tab/<Job Status>
Select the document whose status you want to check.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the print logs
1
<Print Job Log> tab/<Job Log>
Select the document whose log you want to check.
● <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
165
Printing
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
● The displayed document name or user name may not reflect the actual document or user name.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
● This number represents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 449)
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
Canceling Prints(P. 162)
166
Printing
Various Printing Methods
2822-038
This section describes how to print a document by adding a PIN, how to print a file stored on a USB memory device
without using the printer driver, and how to receive and print I-Faxes.
Printing a Document Secured by
a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168)
Printing from a USB Memory
Device (Memory Media Print)
(P. 173)
167
Receiving I-Faxes for
Printing(P. 181)
Printing
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
2822-039
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,
and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure
Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts
of confidential documents from being left unattended.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169)
168
Printing
Printing via Secure Print
2822-089
This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The first part of this
section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how
to print the secured document on the machine.
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 169)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 170)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 170)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
➠ The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab according to the settings.
5
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be
printed.
169
Printing
Printing Out Secured Documents
Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secured Documents(P. 170) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine
and can no longer be printed.
● If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from
printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon
as you can.
● You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.
<Status Monitor> (
)
<Device Information>/<Device Status>
1
Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen.
2
Select the secured document to print.
<Secure Print Memory Usage>
Home Screen(P. 104)
● On the touch panel model, select the check box for the secured document to print, and select <Start>. You
can select multiple documents that have the same PIN.
If a screen for user selection is displayed
● If secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is
displayed prior to the screen for file selection. Select your user name.
Deleting a secured document
● On the touch panel model, you can collectively delete multiple documents. Select the check box for the
secured document to delete, and select <Delete>.
3
Enter the PIN, and press <Apply> (
).
● On the touch panel model, when you select multiple documents with different PINs in step 2, a message is
displayed. Select <Close>, and select the secured documents again in step 2.
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
<Yes>.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is
deleted within a certain period of time.
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
170
Printing
2
Select <Function Settings>.
3
Select <Secure Print>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>.
Disabling Secure Print
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and select <Apply>.
● The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time
specified here elapses.
6
Select <Apply>.
7
Select <OK>.
8
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Function Settings>.
3
Select <Secure Print>.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4
Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
171
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Printing
When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>, restart the machine, and then start the setting procedure again.
Disabling Secure Print
● Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents.
● The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time
specified here elapses.
6
Press
.
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 165)
Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 255)
172
Printing
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media
Print)
2822-08A
You can print files directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove
the USB memory device, see Using a USB Memory Device(P. 156) .
● It is necessary to set <Use Print Function> to <On>.
<Memory Media Settings>(P. 370)
1
Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.
2
Select the check box for the file to print.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● You can select multiple files.
● To clear a selection, select the file you have selected (
) again.
● Selecting a folder displays its contents. To return to the folder in the upper level, select
● Folders and files in a level deeper than the fifth directory are not displayed.
● When you move to another folder, the previous file selections will be cleared.
To select all files
1
Select <Select All>.
● To clear all selections, select <Clear Selection>.
2
If file types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF Files> or <PDF Files>.
To change the file display method
You can select the file display method from "Preview"/"Details."
Preview
Details
173
.
Printing
● You can specify the file display method used to display the <Memory Media Print> screen.
Display Settings>(P. 369)
<Default
To change the file sort order
You can change the sort order of the files in a USB memory device.
● You can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default
setting for the file sort order.
<File Sort Default Settings>(P. 369)
1
Select <Sort Files>.
2
Select the criteria for file sorting.
● When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, files are sorted based on the
modification dates and time of the files.
3
Select <Apply>.
4
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● You can select <Reset> to restore all the default print settings.
<Paper>
Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.
Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print files.
174
Printing
Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print files.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Brightness>
● <Brightness> is not available for printing PDF files.
You can adjust the brightness of images.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<Number of Copies>
Enter the number of copies.
● When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
<2-Sided Printing>
You can select 1-sided printing or 2-sided printing.
Prints on one side of paper.
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally
when bound.
175
Printing
Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically
when bound.
● <2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
<N on 1>
● <N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF files.
You can select an "N on 1" pattern to print multiple pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Does not apply N on 1.
Prints two pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints four pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints eight pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
(PDF only)
● For a PDF file, you can print 9 or 16 pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper by using <N on 1>
under <Set PDF Details>.
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.
176
Printing
<2-Sided Printing>
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1> (JPEG files only)
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Original Type>
You can select the type of original depending on the image to print.
<Photo Priority>
Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.
<Text Priority>
Gives priority to printing text clearly.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
<Error Diffusion>
Prints images with small text or fine lines with a clear finish.
<Print Quality>
You can change settings related to print quality.
177
Printing
<Density>
Adjusts the density for printing.
<Toner Save>
Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other
appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job.
● When <Toner Save> is set to <On>, <Density> is not available.
<Set PDF Details>
You can change the print settings for PDFs.
<2-Sided Printing>
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<N on 1>
Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number
of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of
paper, select <4 on 1>.
<Print Range>
Specify pages you want to print.
<All Pages>
Prints all pages.
<Specified Pages>
Specify the range of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <Start Page> and <End Page>,
and select <Apply>.
178
Printing
● When the specified page range does not match any of the pages of the PDF file, printing is not performed.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
● If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge areas or paper may be partly smudged
depending on the document.
<Print Comments>
This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.
<Off>
Prints no annotations.
<Auto>
Prints only those annotations that are specified to be printed in the PDF file.
<Password to Open Document>
You can print password protected PDF files by entering the password required to open them. Enter the
password, and select <Apply>.
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of
<Halftones>(P. 359) for the description of the setting.
image contained in one document. See
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See
description of the setting.
<Grayscale Conversion>(P. 360) for the
<Print Quality>
<Density>
Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See
<Toner Save>
179
<Density>(P. 340) for the description of the setting.
Printing
Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other
appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job. See
<Toner Save>(P. 341)
for the description of the setting.
<Image Refinement>
Enable or disable the smoothing mode in which the edges of characters and graphics are smoothly
printed. See <Image Refinement>(P. 341) for the description of the setting.
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to process print data. See
5
<Resolution>(P. 341) for the description of the setting.
Select <Start>.
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel>
● If you always want to print with the same settings:
<Yes>.
Memory Media Print(P. 152)
LINKS
<Access Files>(P. 367)
180
Printing
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing
2822-03E
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function that attaches a file to an e-mail as a TIFF image file and transfers it. This machine can
receive I-Faxes and print them. I-Faxes can be received automatically at the specified intervals, and also received
manually.
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings(P. 181)
Receiving I-Faxes Manually(P. 183)
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings
Configure the I-Fax RX setting from a computer, and the print settings from the operation panel of this machine.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
From a Computer
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
181
Starting Remote
Printing
[POP Server]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the POP3 server name or IP address for receiving I-Faxes.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specified e-mail account.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in [Password].
[POP RX]
Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.
[POP Interval]
This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax
documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.
To disable automatic reception
● Set [POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you receive I-Faxes manually.
Manually(P. 183)
Receiving I-Faxes
[Use APOP Authentication]
Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.
[Use TLS for POP]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the check box for
[Verify Certificate] or [Add CN to Verification Items] depending on your needs.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
From the Operation Panel
8
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Specifying the setting for 2-sided printing
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 365)
182
Printing
Specifying the paper size
<RX Print Size>(P. 366)
● Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the POP3 port setting ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 229) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
Receiving I-Faxes Manually
If the I-Fax RX setting is completely configured from the POP3 server, you can manually receive I-Faxes and
print them. When you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or when the
machine is configured so that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes
manually.
1
Press <Status Monitor> (
2
Select <RX Job>.
3
Select <Check I-Fax RX>.
).
➠ Connect to the POP3 server. If there is a document on the server, printing begins.
● Printing a Received Document on Both Sides of Paper:
● Continuing printing even when toner is running low:
Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 365)
183
<Print on Both Sides>(P. 365)
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 185
Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 186
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 187
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 189
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 193
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 194
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 199
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 202
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 203
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 205
184
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
2822-03F
Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile
devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 186)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 193)
Using AirPrint(P. 194)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 205)
● Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.
● When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled in
Security Policy (
Security Policy(P. 272) ), you can use neither Mopria® or AirPrint.
185
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting with Mobile Devices
2822-03H
There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and
communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the
communication environment and the device you are using. Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile
Portal> ( Home Screen(P. 104) ).
◼ Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router
Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 187)
◼ Connecting Directly
Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately
connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)(P. 189)
186
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
2822-03J
If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication
with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to
connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Setting Up the Network
Environment(P. 23)
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Touch Panel Model)(P. 187)
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 188)
● To perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
● Select <LAN Connection> and proceed with the procedure, if the Direct Connection screen is displayed after
<Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.
● For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Touch Panel Model)
◼ Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
◼ Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Select <QR Code>.
187
Home Screen(P. 104)
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
4
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications(P. 193)
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (Black and White LCD Model)
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Display Device Name/IP Address>.
3
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
188
Home Screen(P. 104)
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
2822-03K
1660-068
Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile
device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without difficult
settings.
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)(P. 190)
Connecting Directly (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 191)
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.
Check the network settings of the machine.
● Set the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Preparing the mobile device
● Configure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
Put the machine into the connection standby status.
● <Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<Use Direct Connection> to <On>.
<Direct Connection Settings>
set
Specifying the value for time until auto termination
● You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.
<Direct Connection Termination>/<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 301)
Connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time
● Configure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily.
189
<Access Point Mode Settings>(P. 301)
Linking with Mobile Devices
Canon PRINT Business
● For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting
procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)
● It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
◼ Connecting Manually
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key
4
information that appear on the screen.
When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect>.
◼ Connecting Using a QR Code
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2
Select <Connect>.
3
Select <QR Code>.
4
Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
5
Utilizing the Machine through
Applications(P. 193)
Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
190
Linking with Mobile Devices
6
When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.
● Select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen to check the connected mobile device.
● While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
● When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
Connecting Directly (Black and White LCD Model)
● It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
1
Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
● When any mobile device is already connected, press
2
Select <Connect>.
191
Home Screen(P. 104)
, and proceed to step 3.
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.
4
Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key
5
information that appear on the display.
When the target operation is completed, press
, then select <Disconnect>
<Yes>.
● Select <Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the connected mobile
device.
● While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
● When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
192
Linking with Mobile Devices
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
2822-03L
Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼ Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
● You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼ Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
◼ Printing by Mopria®
The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
Confirming Mopria® Settings
Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges (
Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings]
check box is selected [OK]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) ) [Settings/
[Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]
◼ Printing with Google Cloud Print
You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
193
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using AirPrint
2822-03R
This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.
AirPrint Settings
Configuring AirPrint Settings(P. 194)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 196)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 199)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 202)
Configuring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
2
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
● If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[AirPrint Settings].
194
Linking with Mobile Devices
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]
Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (
Configuring DNS(P. 65) ), the registered name is displayed.
[Location]
Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings]
([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.
[Latitude]
Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
[Longitude]
Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.
6
Click [OK].
If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.
● Use HTTP
● IPP Print Settings
● IPv4 Use mDNS
● IPv6 Use mDNS
● If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (
Configuring DNS(P. 65) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
● Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.
◼ Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, configure the
necessary setting using the operation panel.
195
Linking with Mobile Devices
Changing Print Settings
To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the Function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
IPP Printing> to <Off> or <On>
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
Set <Use
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
<Use IPP
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
Printing> Select <Off> or <On>
Changing the TLS Setting
You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The factory
default setting is <Off>.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
TLS> to <Off> or <On>
<Network>
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
Set <Use
<TCP/IP Settings>
<IPP Print Settings>
<Use
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
TLS> Select <Off> or <On>
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can configure security function
settings.
1
Select [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac
you are using.
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
196
Linking with Mobile Devices
2
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3
Click [Options & Supplies].
4
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
5
Log in to the Remote UI.
● To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.
◼ AirPrint-Dedicated Page
When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.
[AirPrint Settings]
Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the
machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
[Other Settings]
[Print Security Settings]
Configure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
[TLS Settings]
Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS.
TLS(P. 232)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for
[Key and Certificate Settings]
Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate, or request a certificate to be issued.
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
197
Linking with Mobile Devices
[Consumables Information]
Enables you to check the information of each paper source and consumables of the machine and the device
version.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
198
Linking with Mobile Devices
Printing with AirPrint
2822-03S
You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 199)
Printing from a Mac(P. 200)
System Requirements
One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.
● iPad (all models)
● iPhone (3GS or later)
● iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
● Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
*OS
X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection
Network Environment
One of the following environments is required.
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
● For printing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.
Available with AirPrint(P. 195)
Changing the Setting of Functions
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
● For how to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23) .
● For information on the Direct Connection, see
2
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189) .
From the application on your Apple device, tap
199
to display the menu options.
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
Tap [Print].
4
Select this machine from [Printer].
● The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
● The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support
AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Tap [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Checking the print status
● During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice
tap [Print].
Printing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
● For how to make sure of this, see
2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23) .
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners].
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
● How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual or Help for the application you are using.
4
Select the machine in the print dialog box.
● The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
200
Linking with Mobile Devices
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
201
Linking with Mobile Devices
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
2822-03U
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
● Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
● Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
● Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
● Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
● Make sure that the machine is configured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department
ID and password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 216)
● For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sufficient amount
remaining in the toner cartridges. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 196)
202
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using Google Cloud Print
2822-03W
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 203)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
● An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and
when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding
internet connection.
● Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.
● Google Cloud Print does not support printing from an IPv6 address.
● A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on
the Google website.
Checking the Settings of the Machine
Check the following before configuring cloud printing.
● Make sure that the IPv4 address is specified for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with
computers on a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
● Check whether the date and time of the machine are specified correctly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
● If Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department
ID or PIN. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 216)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.
203
Linking with Mobile Devices
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box
6
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Google Cloud Print Settings].
[OK].
Re-Registering the Machine
● To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.
7
Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].
8
Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.
➠ Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
● For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud
Print home page.
Configuring Settings on the Operation Panel
● You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Print Settings>(P. 317)
<Google Cloud
Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome
● You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration.
● For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.
204
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
2822-03X
You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can confirm the machine status or
perform various settings from a mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be displayed properly for
some devices and environments.
Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices
Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, confirm the IP
address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 47) ). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.
1
Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.
Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
● For a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to
confirm all of the items, see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 259)
205
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 207
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 209
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................... 210
Setting the Department ID Management ..................................................................................................... 212
Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 218
Configuring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 220
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 222
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 223
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 226
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 229
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 230
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS .................................................................................................. 232
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 235
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 238
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 241
Configuring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 243
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 250
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 254
Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 255
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 256
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 257
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 258
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 259
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 260
Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 263
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 269
Security Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 272
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 277
Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 280
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 283
206
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
2822-03Y
To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or
unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should
manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.
◼ Configuring the Basic Management System
Setting Access Privileges(P. 209)
Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 220)
◼ Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 254)
◼ Ensuring Effective Management
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 259)
207
Managing the Machine
◼ Managing the System Configuration and Settings
Updating the Firmware(P. 280)
Initializing Settings(P. 283)
208
Managing the Machine
Setting Access Privileges
2822-040
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are
set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
Set up an account with full access privileges called "System Manager ID" for a system manager. Registering an account
called "Department ID" allows you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this
machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI
Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager ID
System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to
log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access items that requires
administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and
register the System Manager ID. Otherwise, anyone will be able to change the machine settings. Only one
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
System Manager ID can be registered.
Department ID (Department ID Management)
You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register
multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login
screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information
such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled. Setting the
Department ID Management(P. 212)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Remote UI PIN(P. 218)
209
Setting a
Managing the Machine
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN
2822-041
Set the system manager account, "System Manager ID." You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the
System Manager ID is specified, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network>
and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System
Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know
the System Manager ID and PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 104)
If the System Manager ID has already been set
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
Select <User Management>
4
Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.
5
Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.
● Specify the <System Manager ID>
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
<System Manager Information Settings>.
<System Manager PIN>.
● Enter numbers for each item, and press <Apply> (
).
● The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.
● You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
● To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in
<Apply> (
) with the fields blank.
Setting the System Manager Name
1
Select <System Manager Name>.
2
Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 116) .
210
and press
Managing the Machine
● Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help
line.
Configuring settings via the Remote UI
● Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration]
[System Manager Information]
[User Management]
[Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
● By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 266)
Logging in to the machine
● If you try to access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management
Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specified, the Login screen is displayed. Logging in to the
Machine(P. 120)
● You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager
Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 209)
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 212)
211
Managing the Machine
Setting the Department ID Management
2822-042
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as
printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To configure Department ID Management, register department IDs as
necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to
enable Department ID Management for operation from a computer.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 212)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 214)
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 215)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 216)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Register or edit Department IDs.
Click [Register New Department].
2
Specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Department ID Management].
Registering a Department ID
1
Starting Remote
212
Managing the Machine
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number to be registered.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.
[Restrict Functions]
You can restrict the number of pages to print for departments to be registered. To restrict the number of
pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter the appropriate number of pages in
[Number of Pages].
3
Click [OK].
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1
Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2
Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
● Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete
click [OK].
[Department ID Page Total]
● You can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.
● If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click
[Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]
[OK].
213
Managing the Machine
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Department ID Management] check box.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Department ID Management].
[Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check box.
● For information about [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs], see
Unknown(P. 216) .
6
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● Department ID Management settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Department ID Management>(P. 373)
Logging in to the machine
● When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is
displayed. Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
214
Managing the Machine
Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer
When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs from a computer, you need to specify the department
ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
3
Click the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].
5
Click [Settings] found to the right.
6
Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
[Properties].
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number.
[PIN]
Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the
computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]
Select the check box to display the [Confirm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from
a computer.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
215
Managing the Machine
7
Click [OK].
Logging in to the machine
● When you try to send job from a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is
cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
"Printing from computer" is configured by default so that the user can execute jobs without entering an ID and PIN
even while Department ID Management is enabled. When you want to configure a setting so that functions cannot be
used unless the ID and PIN are entered, perform the following procedure.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [User Management]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Clear the check boxes as necessary.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Department ID Management].
[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]
In order to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the
correct ID and PIN ( Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 215) ).
However, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not
216
Managing the Machine
entered. When you want to configure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID
and PIN are entered, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 209)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
217
Managing the Machine
Setting a Remote UI PIN
2822-043
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
● When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required.
Management(P. 212)
Setting the Department ID
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [License/Other]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Remote UI Settings].
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text
boxes.
6
Click [OK].
218
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Settings>(P. 378)
<Remote UI
If <Management Settings> are initialized
● The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN.
Menu>(P. 381)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 209)
Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
219
<Initialize
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Network Security Settings
2822-044
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sniffing, spoofing,
and tampering of data as it flows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
Firewall Settings
Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting
communication only to devices that have a specific IP address or MAC address. Restricting Communication
by Using Firewalls(P. 222)
Changing Port Numbers
A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are
predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication
devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229)
Proxy Settings
When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy
server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be
expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 230)
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
220
Managing the Machine
IPSec Communication
While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than TLS. Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
221
Managing the Machine
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
2822-045
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 223)
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 226)
222
Managing the Machine
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
2822-046
You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses, or block devices with specified IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for the target IP address filter.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Firewall Settings].
● Select the filter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,
select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
● Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
223
Managing the Machine
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
2
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
Specify address exceptions.
● Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Check for entry errors
● If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 315)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 316)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description
Entering a single address
Specifying a range of addresses
Specifying a range of addresses with a prefix
Example
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with
colons.
fe80::10
Insert a hyphen between the addresses.
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Enter the address, followed by a slash and
192.168.0.32/27
a number indicating the prefix length.
fe80::1234/64
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
● Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
● Select an IP address and click [Delete].
224
Managing the Machine
3
6
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IP address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 315)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 316)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 226)
225
Managing the Machine
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
2822-047
You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses, or block devices with specified MAC
addresses but permit other communications.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for the target MAC address filter.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Firewall Settings].
● To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from
a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
● Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
226
Managing the Machine
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
[Allow]
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
2
Specify address exceptions.
● Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
● You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
● If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <MAC Address
Filter>(P. 316)
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
● Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
● Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
227
Managing the Machine
3
6
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable MAC address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Filter>(P. 316)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 223)
228
<MAC Address
Managing the Machine
Changing Port Numbers
2822-048
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
● To change the port number for proxy server, see
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Preferences>
Setting a Proxy(P. 230) .
Home Screen(P. 104)
<Network>.
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.
<Port Number Settings>.
Learning more about the protocols
● <LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
● <HTTP>
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 257)
● <POP3>
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing(P. 181)
● <SNMP>
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
● <Multicast Discovery>
Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 78)
5
Enter the port number, and press <Apply> (
6
For the touch panel model, select <OK>.
7
Restart the machine.
).
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
229
Managing the Machine
Setting a Proxy
2822-049
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Proxy Settings].
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
230
Managing the Machine
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specified proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
231
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
2822-04A
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/
PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a "key and certificate"
(server certificate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certificate for TLS before
enabling TLS ( Management Functions(P. 484) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Key and Certificate].
5
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[TLS Settings].
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
6
Select [License/Other]
[Remote UI Settings].
232
Managing the Machine
7
Click [Edit].
8
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
UI>/<Use Remote UI>(P. 378)
<Remote
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
● If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certificate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
Using TLS to encrypt I-Fax reception
● If the POP3 server supports TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with the POP3 server (
Configuring the I-Fax RX Settings(P. 181) ). For more information about the POP3 server, contact your
Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
Limiting the TLS version
● Select [Allowed Versions] on the [TLS Settings] page of Remote UI, and specify the upper limit and lower
limit.
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 235)
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 238)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 241)
233
Managing the Machine
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
234
Managing the Machine
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
2822-04C
A key and certificate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via
Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certificates
are used with the key and certificate generated in "Network Communication."
● If you want to use a server certificate that has a CA signature, you can generate a CSR together with a key
instead of a certificate. Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 238)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key
and certificate before deleting it.
5
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and certificate.
235
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level
becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
236
Managing the Machine
7
Click [OK].
● Generating a key and certificate may take some time.
● After the key and certificate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
LINKS
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 241)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
237
Managing the Machine
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
2822-04E
Because certificates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result
depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certificate authority issue the certificate with the CA
signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certificate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from
Remote UI. When the certificate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 238)
Registering a Certificate to a Key(P. 240)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
Generating a Key and CSR
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Device Management] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certificate before deleting it.
5
Select [Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and CSR.
238
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.
However, the security is tighter.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
● Generating a key and CSR may take some time.
8
Click [Store in File].
239
Managing the Machine
● A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].
➠ The CSR file is stored on the computer.
9
Attach the stored file and submit the application to the certification authority.
Registering a Certificate to a Key
The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certificate issued from the certificate authority based on the
CSR is registered in the key. Once the certification authority has issued the certificate, register it using the procedure
below.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
4
Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] required to register the certificate.
5
Click [Register Certificate].
6
Click [Browse], specify the file for the certificate signing request, and click [Register].
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 235)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 241)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
240
Managing the Machine
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
2822-04F
You can obtain the key and certificate, and the CA certificate from a certification authority (CA) for use with the
machine. Install and register the obtained key and certificate file and CA certificate file in this machine using Remote
UI. Check the key and certificate, and CA certificate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (
Management Functions(P. 484) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Device Management]
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate
Settings].
● Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key and certificate, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA
certificate.
4
Click [Register Key and Certificate] or [Register CA Certificate].
Deleting a registered key and certificate or CA certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate or CA certificate you want to delete
cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates.
click [OK]. You
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or
"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and
certificate before deleting it.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certificates
● Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certificate.
5
Click [Install].
241
Managing the Machine
Deleting the key and certificate file or CA certificate file
● Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete
6
click [OK].
Click [Browse], specify the file to install, and click [Start Installation].
➠ The key and certificate file or the CA certificate file is installed on the machine from a computer.
7
Register the key and certificate or CA certificate.
Registering a key and certificate
1
Click [Register] on the right of the key and certificate file you want to register.
2
Enter the name of the key and password.
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.
3
Click [OK].
Registering a CA certificate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certificate file you want to register.
LINKS
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 235)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
242
Managing the Machine
Configuring IPSec Settings
2822-04H
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check
the system requirements ( Management Functions(P. 484) ) and set the necessary configuration on the computer
before you configure the machine.
Using IPSec with IP address filter
● IP address filter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.
Settings(P. 223)
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Configuring IPSec Settings
Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists
of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector defines conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE configures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the
machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method (
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.
Generate or install the key and certificate beforehand ( Registering the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication(P. 241) ).
AH/ESP
Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used
at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
243
Managing the Machine
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[IPSec Settings].
● If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you define in the
steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
6
Click [Register New Policy].
7
Specify the Policy Settings.
1
In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the
policy.
2
Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
8
Specify the Selector Settings.
244
Managing the Machine
[Local Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[Remote Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the
other devices.
[All IPv6 Addresses]
Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the
other devices.
[IPv4 Manual Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.
Entering IP addresses
245
Managing the Machine
Description
Entering a single address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
Example
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
fe80::10
Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses.
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Prefix Length]
Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prefixes. Enter a
range between 0 and 128 as the prefix length.
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio
button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
IPSec is not applied to the following packets
● Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets
● IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
● ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets
9
Specify the IKE Settings.
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the
aggressive mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to
generate or install the key and certificate before selecting [Digital Signature Method].
Configuring the
Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
[Valid for]
Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
246
Managing the Machine
[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]
Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
[Authentication]
Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption]
Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group]
Select the Diffie-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key
1
Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key
Settings].
2
Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
3
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Authenticating a machine using digital signature method
1
Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and
Certificate].
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
3
10
Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices.
[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]
Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select
either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is
terminated when either of the conditions has been satisfied.
247
Managing the Machine
[Specify by Time]
Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
[Specify by Size]
Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
[Select Algorithm]
Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the
algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also
select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] dropdown lists.
[ESP Authentication]
To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not
Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption]
Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to
specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
11
Click [OK].
● If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.
12
Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
● Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or
down the order.
Editing a policy
● Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.
Deleting a policy
● Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete
13
click [OK].
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
248
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
IPSec>(P. 310)
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
IPSec Policy List(P. 403)
249
<Use
Managing the Machine
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
2822-04J
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certificate or
a CA certificate before configuring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Registering the Key and Certificate for
Network Communication(P. 241) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A
key and certificate issued by a certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when
authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be
used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used
with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method (
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.
Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 232) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 260)
250
Starting Remote
Managing the Machine
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[IEEE 802.1X Settings].
text box.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6
Configure the required settings according to the specified authentication method.
Setting TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate].
● You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use for the client
authentication.
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
251
Managing the Machine
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
● You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.
2
Click [Change User Name/Password].
● To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3
Set the user name/password.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.
4
Click [OK].
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
252
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 315)
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
253
<Use IEEE
Managing the Machine
Restricting the Machine's Functions
2822-04K
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting Printing from a Computer
You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless
the PIN is entered on the machine side. Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 255)
Restricting USB Functions
The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as
an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.
Restricting USB Functions(P. 256)
Disabling HTTP Communication
When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,
you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port. Disabling HTTP
Communication(P. 257)
Disabling Remote Management
When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote
UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 258)
254
Managing the Machine
Restricting Printing from a Computer
2822-04L
You can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the
Secure Print documents ( Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 168) ).
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
<Apply>
<Function Settings> <Secure Print>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<On>
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<On>
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Secure Print>
255
Managing the Machine
Restricting USB Functions
2822-04R
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This
section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory
devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 256)
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 256)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the
machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for
attaching USB memory devices.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
Device>
<Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> in <Use as USB
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu> <Preferences>
Restart the machine
<External Interface>
<USB Settings>
<Use as USB Device>
<Off>
Restricting the USB Print Function
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.
<Menu> <Function Settings>
<Use Print Function> <Apply>
<Access Files> <Memory Media Settings>
<OK> Restart the machine
LINKS
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
256
Select <Off> in
Managing the Machine
Disabling HTTP Communication
2822-04S
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
● Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<TCP/IP Settings>
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 259)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229)
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
257
<Use HTTP>
<Off>
<Yes>
Managing the Machine
Disabling Remote UI
2822-04U
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings>
<Use Remote UI> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> in
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
Settings> <Use Remote UI> <Off> Restart the machine
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 259)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 257)
258
<Remote UI
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
2822-04W
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System
Environment(P. 486) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Checking the Status and Logs(P. 263)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269)
Security Policy(P. 272)
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 277)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
259
Managing the Machine
Starting Remote UI
2822-04X
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 47) ). If you have any questions,
ask your Network Administrator.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
● A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Configuring the
Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232) ). When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3
Log in to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as
necessary.
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID]
and PIN in [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When
you want to check if a specific document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document
of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is
automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login
name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
260
Managing the Machine
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 218)
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN].
Management(P. 212)
4
Setting the Department ID
Click [Log In].
➠ The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Remote UI Screen
When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on
the Portal page and the basic operations.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
[Consumables Information]
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
[Support Link]
Displays the support link specified in [Support Link] under [License/Other].
261
Managing the Machine
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
[Language]
Selects the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information]
under [User Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/
history or cancel the processing.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269)
[Application Library]
Displays the Application Library setting page.
262
Managing the Machine
Checking the Status and Logs
2822-04Y
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 263)
Checking Current Status of Received Documents(P. 264)
Checking History of Documents(P. 264)
Checking Error Information(P. 264)
Checking Consumables(P. 265)
Checking Device Specifications(P. 265)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 266)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 266)
Checking History of Toner Cartridges(P. 267)
Checking Usage Status of the Machine(P. 267)
● A file name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
file name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
in [Print]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Status]
● You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
● Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and
waiting to be printed will be listed.
● If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
263
Managing the Machine
● Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.
You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Checking Current Status of Received Documents
You can check the logs of received I-Fax documents.
Log in to the Remote UI (
in [RX]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Status]
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Log]
Checking History of Documents
The job logs of print or receiving (RX) are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the
Portal page (main page). Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
264
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Error
Managing the Machine
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 261) ).
Log in to the Remote UI (
[Consumables]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Checking Device Specifications
The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Features]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
265
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
Managing the Machine
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. The device name and other system manager
information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management]
page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Check
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Counter]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
266
Managing the Machine
Checking History of Toner Cartridges
You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Log]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Cartridge
Checking Usage Status of the Machine
The monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption are displayed. You can display the Eco
Information screen and change the settings to save paper and power consumption.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260) )
267
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Eco
Managing the Machine
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
268
Managing the Machine
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
2822-050
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic flow of changing the
settings of the machine using the Remote UI.
● Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
● Some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described here.
1
Start the Remote UI.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click the setting you want to configure in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4
Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
269
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Managing the Machine
5
Click [Edit].
6
Specify the required settings.
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine as necessary.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
270
Managing the Machine
● For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.
271
Managing the Machine
Security Policy
2822-08F
It is a common practice for organizations to adopt a security policy that defines basic information security objectives
and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and printers to be operated accordingly. If you
have a security policy to be applied in your organization, apply it to this machine as well.
Viewing the Security Policy(P. 272)
Security Policy Items(P. 272)
To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine(P. 276)
Viewing the Security Policy
You can view the security policy set in the machine using the Remote UI.
1
Start the Remote UI.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Security Settings]
Starting Remote UI(P. 260)
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
[Confirm Security Policy].
Security Policy Items
The following items are displayed by the Remote UI. The items for functions unavailable on this machine are also
displayed, but do not affect the machine operation.
◼ [Interface]
[Wireless Connection Policy]
Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.
[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection] <Use Direct Connection> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to
access the machine from mobile devices.
[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN]
<Direct Connection
Settings>(P. 301)
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN> is set to <Wired LAN>. It is not
<Select Wired/Wireless
possible to establish a wireless connection with the machine via LAN>(P. 299)
a wireless LAN router or access point.
[USB Policy]
Prevent unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.
272
Managing the Machine
[Prohibit Use as USB Device]
<Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to
connect to a computer via USB.
<Use as USB Device>(P. 319)
[Prohibit Use as USB Storage Device] <Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible
<Use USB Storage
to use USB memory devices.
Device>(P. 319)
◼ [Network]
[Communication Operational Policy]
Increase the security of communications by requiring the verification of signatures and certificates.
[Always Verify Signatures for SMS/
WebDAV Server Functions]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Always Verify Server Certificate When
Using TLS]
The following settings in [Use TLS for POP] are set to [On].
● [Verify Certificate]
● [Add CN to Verification Items]
The following settings in [Use Google Cloud Print] are set
to [On].
Receiving I-Faxes for
Printing(P. 181)
Registering the Machine
with Google Cloud
Print(P. 203)
● [Verify Server Certificate]
● [Add CN to Verification Items]
[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for
Server Functions]
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port
Authentication Method> is set to <Mode 2>. When using
the machine as a server, plain text authentication and
functions that use plain text authentication are not
<Dedicated Port Auth.
Method>/<Dedicated Port
Authentication
Method>(P. 314)
available.
[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1]
In <SNMP Settings>, <SNMPv1 Settings> is set to <Off>. It
is not possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device
information from the computer.
<SNMP Settings>(P. 311)
● This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, even if [Always Verify Server
Certificate When Using TLS] is set to [On].
● If [Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions] is set to [On] and your device management
software or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using
the latest versions.
[Port Usage Policy]
Prevent external breaches by closing unused ports.
[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)]
In <LPD Settings>, <Use LPD Printing>/<LPD Print Settings> is
<LPD Settings>(P. 309)
set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform LPD printing.
[Restrict RAW Port (Port Number: 9100)] In <RAW Settings>, <Use RAW Printing>/<RAW Print Settings>
<RAW
is set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform RAW printing.
Settings>(P. 309)
[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702, The following settings in <WSD Settings> are set to <Off>. It is
<WSD
60000)]
not possible to use WSD functions.
Settings>(P. 310)
● <Use WSD Printing>
273
Managing the Machine
● <Use WSD Browsing>
● <Use Multicast Discovery>
[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number:
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
1900)]
change to the security level.
[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)]
Part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices
using applications will be turned <Off>, disabling part of
printing from mobile devices using applications.
[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137,
138, 139, 445)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number:
9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015,
9017-9019, 9022, 9023, 9025, 20317,
47545-47547)]
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings> is set to
<Off>. It is not possible to use dedicated ports.
[Restrict Remote Operator's Software
Port (Port Number: 5900)]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
Linking with Mobile
Devices(P. 185)
<Use Dedicated Port>/
<Dedicated Port
Settings>(P. 313)
[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number: This function is not available on this machine, giving no
5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]
change to the security level.
[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number:
5353)]
The following settings will be turned <Off>, and part of the
settings to enable printing from mobile devices using
applications will also be turned <Off>. It will be disabled to
search the network or perform automatic settings using
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6
Settings>/<DNS
Settings> (Touch panel
model)(P. 302)
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6
mDNS. In addition, part of printing from mobile devices using
Settings> (Black and
applications will be disabled as well.
white LCD model)
<IPv4>
<Use mDNS>
● <mDNS Settings>
(P. 306)
● <mDNS Settings>
<IPv6>
<Use mDNS>
Registering the
● [Use Google Cloud Print]
[Local Print]
Machine with Google
Cloud Print(P. 203)
Linking with Mobile
Devices(P. 185)
[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)]
In [Multicast Discovery Settings], [Discovery Response] is set
to [Off]. It is not possible to search the network or perform
Configuring SLP
Communication with
automatic settings using SLP.
Device Management
Software(P. 79)
[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number:
In <SNMP Settings>, the <SNMPv1 Settings> and <SNMPv3
161)]
Settings> are set to <Off>. It is not possible to obtain device
information from the computer or configure settings using
SNMP.
<SNMP
Settings>(P. 311)
◼ [Authentication]
[Authentication Operational Policy]
[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
[Force Setting of Auto Logout]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
274
Managing the Machine
[Password Operational Policy]
[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Password Settings Policy]
[Minimum Number of Characters for Password]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Password Validity Period]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive
Characters]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to
the security level.
[Lockout Policy]
Block users from logging in for a specified period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.
[Enable Lockout]
In <Lockout>/<Lockout Settings>, <Enable Lockout> is set to
<On>. Specify the values for <Lockout Threshold> and <Lockout
Period>.
<Lockout>/<Lockout
Settings>(P. 382)
◼ [Key/Certificate]
Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a
designated hardware component.
[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]
<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak
<Encryption
Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not possible to use weak
encryption.
Settings>(P. 383)
[Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak
In <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak
Encryption]
Encryption>, <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit
Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not
possible to use a key or certificate with weak encryption.
<Encryption
Settings>(P. 383)
[Use TPM to Store Password and Key]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no
change to the security level.
275
Managing the Machine
◼ [Log]
[Force Recording of Audit Log] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
[Force SNTP Settings]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
◼ [Job]
[Printing Policy]
[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Sending/Receiving Policy]
[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Force Confirmation of Fax Number]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
[Prohibit Auto Forwarding]
This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the
security level.
◼ [Storage]
[Force Complete Deletion of Data] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.
To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine
You can import the security policy edited on the imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series or using Device Management
Software to apply it to this machine. In addition, you can export the security policy as applied to this machine to apply
it to other machines*. Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 277)
*Only
Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings
● The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting
machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.
If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password configured for the exporting machine
is set to the importing machine.
● You cannot set or change the security policy on this machine.
276
Managing the Machine
Importing/Exporting the Setting Data
2822-051
Machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer can also be
registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to another machine of the
same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use these features, it is
required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
Exporting the Setting Data(P. 277)
Importing the Setting Data(P. 278)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete
● It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the import or export process
● Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.
● For the settings that cannot be imported/exported, see
Setting Menu List(P. 286) .
● You can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the
machine. <Import/Export>(P. 380)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 269) .
Exporting the Setting Data
You can export machine settings data, and save them on a computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up
important settings.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Data Management]
4
Specify the encryption password.
[Export].
277
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Managing the Machine
[Encryption Password]
Enter a password to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in
[Confirm]. To export the data, you must set an encryption password.
● The password is required when exported data is imported.
5
6
Importing the Setting Data(P. 278)
Click [Start Exporting].
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported
data.
➠ The setting data will be saved.
Importing the Setting Data
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another
machine to your machine if the models are the same.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 260)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Data Management]
4
Specify the file to import, and enter the password.
[Import].
278
Remote UI Screen(P. 261)
Managing the Machine
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the file. You can only import a device configuration information file (*.dcm).
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
5
Click [Start Importing].
6
Click [OK].
➠ The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
7
Click [OK].
➠ If the [Settings/Registration] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.
279
Managing the Machine
Updating the Firmware
2822-052
For the firmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two
methods of update: the one is to access the latest firmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the
update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest firmware
version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed
in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a
wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.
Installation Condition of the Machine
How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 280)
Wired LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 280)
Updating from a Computer(P. 281)
USB connection
Updating from a Computer(P. 281)
● If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform firmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,
and perform the update from the computer.
Checking the firmware version
● You can check the firmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the
firmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly. Checking the Firmware
Version(P. 282)
Updating via the Internet
You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the firmware to the latest version.
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
Select <Update Firmware> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
➠ A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
● If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the
firmware.
2
When a license screen appears, select <Accept>.
280
Managing the Machine
3
Select <OK>.
➠ When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
4
Select <Via Internet>.
<Update Firmware>.
➠ A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
● If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the firmware.
5
Check the message and select <Yes>.
6
When a license screen appears, press
7
Select <OK>.
.
➠ When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.
Updating from a Computer
When you have downloaded the latest firmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility
software to update the firmware from a computer. For how to perform firmware update from a computer, see the
"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the firmware.
281
Managing the Machine
To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmware> <Update Firmware> <Via PC> <Yes>
Checking the Firmware Version
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3
4
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
Select <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
Firmware>.
Select <Version Information>.
➠ The current firmware version is displayed.
282
<Update
Managing the Machine
Initializing Settings
2822-053
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Menu(P. 283)
Initializing Key and Certificate(P. 283)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 284)
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 286) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to restart the machine after initialization.
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
you want to initialize
<Yes>
<Data Management>
<Initialize Menu>
Select the item
(Restart the machine if necessary)
● You can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.
Touch Panel Model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Network>
<Initialize Network Settings>
<Yes>
<OK>
Restart the
<Initialize Network Settings>
<Yes>
Restart the machine
Black and White LCD Model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
Initializing Key and Certificate
You can restore the settings of the key and certificate and the CA certificate. Note that all the keys and certificates and
CA certificates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certificates) will be deleted after
initializing.
● After initializing, functions that require a key and certificate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE
of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, configure the settings for the key and
certificate and activate the functions again.
283
Managing the Machine
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
Certificate>
<Data Management>
<Initialize Key and
<Yes>
Initializing All Data/Settings
This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents
sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process finishes,
the machine automatically restarts.
● Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.
These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.
● To use the machine after initializing it, you need to configure all settings from the beginning.
<Menu>
<Management Settings>
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 232)
284
<Yes> (
)
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 286
<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 287
<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 288
<English Keyboard Layout> .......................................................................................................................... 292
<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 293
<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 299
<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 319
<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 320
<Volume Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 323
<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 325
<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 326
<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 333
<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 334
<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 335
<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 338
<Receive> ..................................................................................................................................................... 365
<Access Files> ............................................................................................................................................... 367
<Secure Print> .............................................................................................................................................. 371
<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 372
<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 373
<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 375
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> ........................................................................... 378
<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 380
<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 382
285
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
2822-054
You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by configuring settings described in this
chapter. To start configuration, select <Menu> on the Home screen ( Home Screen(P. 104) ). This section describes
what each item in the setting menu can configure.
<Preferences>(P. 287)
This section describes the display and network settings.
<Adjustment/Maintenance>(P. 325) This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the
machine.
<Function Settings>(P. 334)
This section describes the settings for the individual functions.
<Management Settings>(P. 372)
This section describes the user and hardware information management, security
settings, etc.
● You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Settings(P. 403)
286
Printing Lists of
Setting Menu List
<Preferences>
2822-055
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Item
<Display Settings>(P. 288)
Description
This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.
<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 292) This section describes the USB keyboard settings.
<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 293)
This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.
<Network>(P. 299)
This section describes the network settings.
<External Interface>(P. 319)
This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.
<Accessibility>(P. 320)
This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen
colors and setting the message display time.
<Volume Settings>(P. 323) *
This section describes the sound volume settings.
287
Setting Menu List
<Display Settings>
2822-056
All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 288)
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>/<Button Display Order on Home Screen>(P. 288)
<Language>(P. 288)
<Remote UI Language>(P. 289)
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>(P. 290)
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 290)
<Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly> (P. 291)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>
By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function
is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function.
<Home>
<Secure Print>
<Status Monitor>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Restoration>
<Display Settings>
<Default Screen After Startup/
Select a function to display the desired screen
<Home Screen Button Display Settings>/<Button Display Order on Home
Screen> *1
Configure the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen.
<Language> *2
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
<Català>
<Čeština>
288
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 150)
Setting Menu List
<Dansk>
<Deutsch>
<Eesti>
<English>
<Español>
<Euskara>
<Français>
<Hrvatski>
<Italiano>
<Latviešu>
<Lietuvių>
<Magyar>
<Nederlands>
<Norsk>
<Polski>
<Português>
<Română>
<Slovenčina>
<Slovenščina>
<Suomi>
<Svenska>
<Türkçe>
<Ελληνικά>
<Български>
<Русский>
<‫>العربية‬
<日本語>
<中文(繁體)>
<中文(简体)>
<한국어>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Remote UI Language> *2
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
<English>
<Japanese>
<French>
<Spanish>
<German>
<Italian>
<Dutch>
<Finnish>
<Portuguese>
<Norwegian>
<Swedish>
<Danish>
<Czech>
289
<Language>
Select a language
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
<Hungarian>
<Russian>
<Turkish>
<Polish>
<Chinese (Simplified)>
<Chinese (Traditional)>
<Korean>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Remote UI Language>
Select a
language
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select the unit of measurement.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
Touch panel model
<Auto>
<Off>
<Custom>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Auto>
<Custom>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Auto>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
Enter toner level in <Custom>
290
<Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>
<Apply>
Select <Off> in
Setting Menu List
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Custom>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Enter toner level
<Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly>
Select whether to display a message that prompts you to clean the fixing unit. If you set to <On>, you can specify the
timing to display a prompt message for cleaning the fixing unit, in terms of the number of printed pages and in units
of 1,000.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Assembly>
<Preferences>
<On>
<Display Settings>
<Display Notif. to Clean Fixing
Enter the number of printed pages
291
<Apply> (
)
Setting Menu List
<English Keyboard Layout>
2822-057
Specify the layout of an USB keyboard if connected to the machine. The default setting is marked with a dagger ( ).
<USA Layout>
<UK Layout>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<English Keyboard Layout>
292
Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>
Setting Menu List
<Timer/Energy Settings>
2822-058
All the settings related to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Current Date/Time Settings>(P. 293)
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 293)
<Date Format>(P. 294)
<Time Format>(P. 294)
<Auto Reset Time>(P. 295)
<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 296)
<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 296)
<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 297)
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>(P. 297)
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>(P. 297)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Current Date/Time Settings> *1
Set the current date and time.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current
date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
<Date/Time Settings>
Specify the date and time standard of the region in which the machine is to be installed.
293
Setting Menu List
<Time Zone>
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accordingly. Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time>
to <(UTC+14:00)
Kiritimati Island>
UTC
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Daylight Saving Time Settings> *2
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect.
<Off>
<On>
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, Week, Day
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Time Settings>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Select <On>, and specify the dates
<Date/Time Settings>
<Daylight Saving
<Apply>
<Date Format> *2
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
<YYYY MM/DD>
<MM/DD/YYYY>
<DD/MM YYYY>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Time Format>
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<12 Hour (AM/PM)>
294
<Date Format>
Select the date format
Setting Menu List
<24 Hour>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Time Format>
Select the display
setting
<Auto Reset Time>
If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the
default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
● The setting menu is displayed.
● The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.
● An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the
error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 2
to 9 (min.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
This Function>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
Enter the time in <Set Time>
<Auto Reset Time>
Select <On> in <Set
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Reset Time>
Specify the Auto
Reset time
● The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
295
Setting Menu List
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is
selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed (
<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 288) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the
main screen of the function that was selected.
<Default Function>
<Selected Function>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select
<Default Function> or <Selected Function>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the
machine entered the sleep mode.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
<Set Time>
1 to 4
to 8 (hr.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
set the Auto Shutdown time
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Select <On>, and
<Auto Shutdown Time>
Set the Auto
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Shutdown time
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Apply>
296
Setting Menu List
Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>
● When the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you
are operating the machine from the Remote UI. A malfunction may occur, particularly if the machine shuts
down while data is being imported. When you import data using the Remote UI, set <Auto Shutdown Time>
to <Off> or <0> in advance.
● If any settings of the [Timer Settings] are changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically
shuts down after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
<Auto Sleep Time>
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
1
to 60 (min.)
<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>
You can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 23:59)
<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>
Specify the time when the machine is recovered from the sleep mode.
Touch panel model
<Set This Function>
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
297
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
Setting Menu List
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
(0:00 to 23:59)
298
Setting Menu List
<Network>
2822-059
All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 299)
<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 299)
<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 301)
<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 302)
<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 302)
<SNMP Settings>(P. 311)
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 313)
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port Authentication Method>(P. 314)
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 314)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 314)
<Use IEEE 802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 315)
<Firewall Settings>(P. 315)
<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 317)
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings Management On/Off>(P. 317)
<Monitoring Service>(P. 317)
<RMT-SW>(P. 317)
<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 318)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
<Wired LAN>
<Wireless LAN>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
<SSID Settings>
Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
299
Setting Menu List
<Select Access Point>
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wireless Router(P. 33)
<Enter Manually>
Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 36)
<Security Settings>
<None>
<WEP>
<Open System>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<Shared Key>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<WPA/WPA2-PSK>
<Auto>
<AES-CCMP>
<WPS Push Button Mode>
Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router.
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
Setting
<WPS PIN Code Mode>
Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router.
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
Setting Up
<Power Save Mode>
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
message
<Preferences>
<OK>
<Network>
<Power Save Mode>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Read the displayed
Select <Off> or <On>
<Connection Information>/<Wireless LAN Information> *1
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
<MAC Address>
<Wireless LAN Status>
<Latest Error Information>
<Channel>
<SSID Settings>
<Security Settings>
<Power Save Mode>
300
Setting Menu List
<Direct Connection Settings>
Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
<Use Direct Connection>
<Off>
<On>
<Direct Connection Termination>/<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>
Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.
Touch panel model
<Automatically Terminate Session>
<Off>
<On>
<Time Until Session Terminates>
1
to 60 (min.)
Black and white LCD model
0 (Do not terminate session automatically)
1 to 60 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Direct Connection
Termination> Select <On> in <Automatically Terminate Session> and enter the time <Apply>
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Connection Termination>
<Network>
<Direct Connection Settings>
<Time Until Direct
Enter the time
<Access Point Mode Settings>
Configure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the
same time, you need to configure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Use Custom SSID>
<Off>
<On>
<SSID>
<Use Custom Network Key>
301
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Network Key>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings>
Settings> Select <On> for each item and select <SSID>/<Network Key>
key
<Apply>
<Apply>
<Access Point Mode
Enter the SSID/network
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode
Settings> <Use Custom SSID>/<Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network
key
<Apply>
<Easy Connection via PC>
Start the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). You can use Canon Laser NW Device Setup
Utility to configure network settings via a computer.
<Menu> <Preferences>
process starts
<Network>
<Easy Connection via PC>
<Yes>
The connection
● Download Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
<TCP/IP Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings>/<DNS Settings> (Touch panel model)
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Address Settings>
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a
TCP/IP network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
<Auto Acquire>
<Auto Acquire>
302
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire> *2
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire WINS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire POP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network.
Connection(P. 43)
Testing the Network
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
<Use IPv6>
<Off>
303
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Check IPv6 Settings>
You can check the link-local address that is automatically acquired.
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
<Stateless Address Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DHCPv6 Settings>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.
<Use DHCPv6>
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<IPv4 DNS Server Address Settings>
Specify the IP address of the DNS server in the IPv4 environment.
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
Specify the host name of the machine to be registered in the DNS server as well as the name of the
domain to which the machine belongs.
<IPv4>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
304
Setting Menu List
<IPv6>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
Select whether to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed.
<IPv4>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<IPv6>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Manual Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateful Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateless Address>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
<IPv4>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<mDNS Name>
<IPv6>
<Use mDNS>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4>
<Off>
<mDNS Name>
305
Setting Menu List
<On>
<IPv4 Settings>/<IPv6 Settings> (Black and white LCD model)
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Address Settings>
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a
TCP/IP network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
<Auto Acquire>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire> *2
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<Auto Acquire>*2
<Select Protocol>*2
<Auto IP>*2
<IP Address>
<Subnet Mask>
<Gateway Address>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network.
Connection(P. 43)
Testing the Network
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<DNS Server Settings>
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
306
Setting Menu List
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Off>
<On>
<mDNS Name>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire WINS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire POP Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
<Use IPv6>
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings.
Addresses(P. 44)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Link-Local Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
307
Setting IPv6
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Use DHCPv6>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 44)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist. Manual Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist. Stateful Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<Regist Stateless Addr.>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<mDNS Settings>
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.
<Off>
<On>
<Use IPv4 Name for mDNS>
308
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<mDNS Name>
<On>
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Configuring DNS(P. 65)
<Acquire DNS Server Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Acquire Domain Name>
<Off>
<On>
<WINS Settings>
Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Configuring WINS(P. 71)
<WINS Resolution>
<Off>
<On>
<WINS Server Address>: 0.0.0.0
<LPD Settings>
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You
can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
<Use LPD Printing>/<LPD Print Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<RAW Settings>
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specific printing protocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD
which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Functions(P. 51)
<Use RAW Printing>/<RAW Print Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<RX Timeout>
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
309
Setting Menu List
<WSD Settings>
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 51)
Touch panel model
<Use WSD Printing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Discovery>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<WSD Print Settings>
<Use WSD Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Discovery>
<Off>
<On>
<Use HTTP>
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 257)
<Off>
<On>
<Use IPSec> *1
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Configuring IPSec Settings(P. 243)
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
310
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<On> <OK> Restart the machine
<TCP/IP Settings>
<Use IPSec>
Select <Off> or
<TCP/IP Settings>
<Use IPSec>
Select <Off> or
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<On> Restart the machine
<Port Number Settings>
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment.
<LPD>
1 to 515
Changing Port Numbers(P. 229)
to 65535
<RAW>
1 to 9100
to 65535
<WSD Multicast Discovery>
1 to 3702 to 65535
<HTTP>
1 to 80
to 65535
<Multicast Discovery>
1 to 427 to 65535
<POP3>
1 to 110
to 65535
<SNMP>
1 to 161
to 65535
<MTU Size>
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives.
Unit(P. 63)
Changing the Maximum Transmission
<1300>
<1400>
<1500>
<SNMP Settings>
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 73)
311
Setting Menu List
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv1
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Preferences> <Network>
Restart the machine
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Select <Off>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Settings> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv3
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Preferences> <Network>
Restart the machine
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Select <Off>
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
312
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Acquire
Printer Mngt. Info. from Host> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
Host> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from
<Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790>
Specify whether to conform to the advanced specifications (RFC2790) of the protocol when monitoring the
machine status from the SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790> <Apply>
<SNMP Settings> Select <Off> or <On> in <Format
<OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings>
RFC2790> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Format Host Resources MIB to
<Use Dedicated Port>/<Dedicated Port Settings>
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing from the computer and when browsing
or specifying the machine settings over the network.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
313
<Use Dedicated Port>
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<On> Restart the machine
<Dedicated Port Settings>
Select <Off> or
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port Authentication Method>
Specify whether to limit the authentication method specifically to the secure one when using the dedicated port. If
<Mode 2> is selected, the authentication method is limited specifically to the secure one.
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
Authentication Method>
<Network>
<Dedicated Port Auth. Method>/<Dedicated Port
Select <Mode 1> or <Mode 2>
● If <Mode 2> is selected, you cannot establish a connection from the device management software or driver
in some cases.
<Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>/<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment.
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 64)
0
Setting a
to 300 (sec.)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>
Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/
full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.
<Auto Detect>
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 61)
<Off>
<Communication Mode>
<Half Duplex>
<Full Duplex>
<Ethernet Type>
<10BASE-T>
<100BASE-TX>
<1000BASE-T>
314
Setting Menu List
<On>
● When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duplex>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.
<MAC Address>
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device.
the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Viewing
<Use IEEE 802.1X>/<IEEE 802.1X Settings> *1*2
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Use IEEE 802.1X>
Select <Off> or <On>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences>
the machine
<Network>
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
Restart
<Firewall Settings>
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses.
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 223)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
315
Setting Menu List
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 223)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<MAC Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 226)
<Outbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
316
Setting Menu List
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select
<Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings>
<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<MAC Address Filter>
Restart the machine
Select
<Google Cloud Print Settings>
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print.
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
<Use Google Cloud Print>/<Enable Google Cloud Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Google Cloud Print Regist. Status>/<Google Cloud Print Registration Status> *1
<Device Settings Management>/<Device Settings Management On/Off>
Specify whether to use iW Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as settings. For detailed
information on iW Management Console, contact your nearest Canon dealer. Configuring Settings for
Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins(P. 80)
<Off>
<On>
<Monitoring Service> *1*2
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the
machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Network>
<Monitoring Service>
<Yes>
<RMT-SW>
Leave this switch set to <Off>. When the service representative remotely performs device maintenance, you may be
asked to set the switch to <On>.
<Off>
317
Setting Menu List
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Network>
<RMT-SW>
Select <Off> or <On>
<OK>
Restart the
<Network>
<RMT-SW>
Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
machine
<Preferences>
<Initialize Network Settings>
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults.
318
<Initialize Menu>(P. 381)
Setting Menu List
<External Interface>
2822-05A
All the settings related to the USB are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<USB Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable use of the USB port or a USB memory device.
<Use as USB Device>
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer.
Connection with a Computer(P. 256)
Restricting the USB
<Off>
<On>
<Use USB Storage Device>
Specify whether to use a USB memory device.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
USB Storage Device> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Select <Off> or <On> in <Use
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
Device>
<Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
319
<Use USB Storage
Setting Menu List
<Accessibility>
2822-05C
All the settings related to accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and message display time, are listed with
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 320)
<Brightness>(P. 320)
<Contrast>(P. 321)
<Message Display Time>(P. 321)
<Scrolling Speed>(P. 321)
<Cursor Movement Type>(P. 321)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Brightness>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Brightness>
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu>
(
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
)
320
<Brightness>
Adjust the brightness
<Apply>
Setting Menu List
<Contrast> *
Adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation location of
the machine.
Seven Levels
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Contrast>
Adjust the contrast
<Message Display Time>
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2
to 5 (sec.)
<Menu>
interval
<Preferences>
<Apply> (
<Accessibility>
<Message Display Time>
Enter a number for the
)
<Scrolling Speed> *
Adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.
<Slow>
<Standard>
<Fast>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Scrolling Speed>
Select the speed
<Cursor Movement Type> *
Configure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. If <Auto> is selected, the cursor
automatically moves to the next entry field after text has been entered. If <Manual> is selected, use
to move the
cursor.
<Auto>
<Manual>
321
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Accessibility>
<Manual>
322
<Cursor Movement Type>
Select <Auto> or
Setting Menu List
<Volume Settings>
2822-05E
All the settings used to generate the confirmation sound of a key being pressed, the sound indicating completion of
the printing process, and other sounds, are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Entry Tone>(P. 323)
<Invalid Entry Tone>(P. 323)
<Restock Supplies Tone>(P. 323)
<Warning Tone>(P. 323)
<Job Done Tone>(P. 324)
<Energy Saver Alert>(P. 324)
● For information about the setting procedures, see
Setting Sounds(P. 153) .
<Entry Tone>
Select whether an entry tone is generated when a key on the operation panel has been pressed.
<Off>
<On>
<Invalid Entry Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated when an invalid key operation has been performed, for example, when an invalid
numeric value has been entered.
<Off>
<On>
<Restock Supplies Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated that indicates the end of toner cartridge lifetime is approaching.
<Off>
<On>
<Warning Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated that indicates a machine operation error such as a paper jam or an incorrect
operation has occurred.
<Off>
<On>
323
Setting Menu List
<Job Done Tone>
Select whether a tone is generated when printing has been completed.
<Off>
<On>
<Energy Saver Alert>
Select whether to generate the notification tone when the machine enters or exits sleep mode.
<Off>
<On>
324
Setting Menu List
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
2822-05F
Item
Description
<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 326) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.
<Maintenance>(P. 333)
This section describes how to use the cleaning functions.
325
Setting Menu List
<Adjust Image Quality>
2822-05H
All the settings related to image quality adjustment are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Printer Density>(P. 326)
<Toner Save>(P. 326)
<Adjust Print Position>(P. 326)
<Special Processing>(P. 327)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Printer Density>
Adjust this if the printed text or thin lines are faded.
Adjusting Print Density(P. 398)
Nine Levels
<Toner Save>
You can save toner when performing report printing.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Toner Save>
Select <Off> or
<On>
<Adjust Print Position>
Adjust the print position for each paper source. The print position can be adjusted in the range from -5.0 mm to +5.0
mm in increments of 0.1 mm. Adjusting Print Position(P. 399)
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>
326
Setting Menu List
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Drawer 1>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Drawer 2> *
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>
-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm)
<Special Processing>
If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
<Special Paper Processing>
When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved
by adjusting the following settings.
<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting
separately for each paper source.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2> *
<Off>
<On>
327
Setting Menu List
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
<On> in the paper source to be set
<Apply>
Select
<Yes>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>
paper source
Select the
<On>
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected when a certain length of time elapses after printing on
the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
<Rough Surface Envelope Mode>
When printing on envelopes with rough surfaces, select <On>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Envelope Mode>
(
<On>
<Yes>
)
If you set <Rough Surface Envelope Mode> to <On>
● The <Paper Curl Correction> setting will be disabled.
● The printing speed may be slower.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>
Printouts may wrinkle depending on the paper to use. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the
problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Paper Wrinkle Correction> <On>
(
)
328
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
● If you set to <On>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.
<Paper Curl Correction>
If the printed paper curls, set this item to <On>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Paper Processing>
<Special
<Paper Curl Correction>
<On>
<Yes> (
)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
<Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr>
When a halftone image such as a photograph is printed on a small size piece of heavy paper, streaks may
appear on the back side of the paper. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special
Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml.
Ppr>
<On>
<Yes> (
)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output>
When performing 2-sided printing, paper may stick together at the output. Setting to <On> will slow down the
printing speed to reduce sticking.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
329
<Yes> (
)
<Special Processing>
Setting Menu List
<High Humidity Mode>
Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Humidity Mode>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<High
)
● If you set to <On>, the print density may vary depending on the ambient humidity.
<Low Humidity Mode>
When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this
case, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>. First try the
adjustment with <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Humidity Mode>
Select the mode
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Yes> (
<Special Processing>
<Low
)
● If <Low Humidity Mode> is specified, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used
in an environment with high humidity.
<Reduce Ghosting 1>
When you print on large size paper after printing on small size paper, afterimages may appear in blank areas.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Reduce Ghosting 1>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<On>
330
<Yes> (
)
<Special
Setting Menu List
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
<Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)>
If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other
than <Off> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<Rdc
<On>
)
Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)>/<Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)>
<Yes> (
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
<Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks>
If printouts have creases when damp paper is used or if streaks appear in the leading edge of paper when
images with halftones such as photos are printed, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks>
<On>
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Yes> (
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
<Quiet Mode>
When printing sounds bother you, set this item to <On>.
<Off>
<On>
331
)
<Special Processing>
<Rdc.
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
Mode>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<On>
<Yes> (
<Adjust Image Quality>
<Special Processing>
<Quiet
)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
<Correct Blurry Image>
Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,
setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is weakest with <Mode 1> and strongest with
<Mode 4>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Mode 3>
<Mode 4>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Processing>
<Correct Blurry Image>
<Adjust Image Quality>
Select the mode
<Yes> (
<Special
)
● Setting a stronger improvement effect may result in lighter print density or slower printing speed. It
may also result in less sharp edges and rougher details.
332
Setting Menu List
<Maintenance>
2822-05J
The cleaning functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 333)
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
<Clean Fixing Assembly>
Clean the fixing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts.
Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
Cleaning the
<Control Condensation>
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which
may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When
selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs.
<Off>
<On>
<Allow Job Printing During Process>
<Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Check the message
<OK> (
)
<Maintenance>
Select the item
(
<Control Condensation>
)
<On>
<Yes>
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
333
Setting Menu List
<Function Settings>
2822-05K
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Item
Description
<Common>(P. 335)
This section describes settings common to each function.
<Printer>(P. 338)
This section describes how to specify printer settings.
<Receive>(P. 365)
This section describes how to specify settings for receiving I-Faxes.
<Access Files>(P. 367) *
This section describes the settings for printing stored files.
<Secure Print>(P. 371)
This section describes the settings for the Secure Print.
334
Setting Menu List
<Common>
2822-05L
All the items related to settings common to each function are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with
a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Paper Feed Settings>
Configure paper feed settings.
<Paper Source Auto Selection>/<Drawer Auto Selection On/Off>
Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is
set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the
appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching
from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size. Automatically Selecting an
Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 147)
<Printer>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Receive>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Other>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Off>
335
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Drawer 1>
<Off>
<On>
<Drawer 2>*
<Off>
<On>
<Switch Paper Feed Method>
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with
logos, you need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are
performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load
the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. For more
information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 133) .
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Drawer 1>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Drawer 2> *
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu>
Method>
<Function Settings>
<Common>
Select the paper source
<Paper Feed Settings>
<Switch Paper Feed
Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
● We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
336
Setting Menu List
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2sided printing is selected.
● If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing
( Available Paper(P. 478) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need
to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 133) ).
● 1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
337
Setting Menu List
<Printer>
2822-05R
All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Printer Settings>(P. 338)
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 363)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
● Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.
Priority of settings
● If a print setting is specified both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specification from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specification from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specific cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and
printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.
<Printer Settings>
Configure settings about printing and printer operations.
<Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch>
When the paper size of each paper source is set to <Free Size> in <Paper Settings>, you can specify the
operation that is to be performed when the size of the loaded paper is significantly different from the setting in
the printer driver.
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Drawer 1>
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Drawer 2> *1
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
338
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
Mismatch>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Select a paper source
<Printer Settings>
<Action When Free Paper Size
Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>
<Force Output>
Continues printing even if the size setting in the printer driver is significantly different from the size of the
loaded paper.
<Display Error>
Displays an error message and stops printing when the setting in the printer driver is significantly different
from the size of the loaded paper.
● If the printer driver's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected, a
paper jam or printing error may occur.
<Copies>
Set the number of copies to print.
1
to 999
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
copies to print
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Copies>
Set the number of
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<2-Sided Printing>
)
<2-Sided Printing>
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Off> or <On>
<Default Paper>
Use this item to specify the paper size and type.
Available Paper(P. 478)
339
Select
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
paper size
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Default Paper>
Select the
Select the paper type
<Paper Size Override>
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but
the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print from the computer but A4 size
paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Paper Size Override>
Select
<Off> or <On>
● You can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an
application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specified on
the machine.
<Print Quality>
You can change settings related to print quality.
<Density> *1
Adjust the toner density.
Touch panel model
17 Levels
<Fine Adjust>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
Black and white LCD model
<Density>
17 Levels
<Density (Fine Adjust)>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 Levels
Touch panel model
340
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Density>
<Printer>
Adjust the density
<Printer Settings>
<Print
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Density>
<Printer>
<Density>
<Printer Settings>
Adjust the density
<Print
<Apply>
● You can use <Fine Adjust> or <Density (Fine Adjust)> to adjust the toner density to three density
levels: high density, medium density, and low density.
● When <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.
<Toner Save>
You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance
characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Save>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Toner
Select <Off> or <On>
<Image Refinement>
Enable or disable the smoothing mode in which the edges of characters and graphics are smoothly printed.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Refinement>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
341
<Print Quality>
<Image
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Quality>
<Resolution>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Print
Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>
<Layout>
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.
<Binding Location>
If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind
on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which specifies the
binding margin to apply to the binding position.
<Long Edge>
<Short Edge>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Location>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Layout>
<Binding
Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
<Gutter>
Shift the print position to adjust the binding margin to apply to the binding edge specified by <Binding
Location>. The value "00.0" exerts no effect on the binding margin.
-50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
342
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
the binding margin
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Layout>
<Gutter>
Specify
)
Entering the setting value
Specify the print position shift direction and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value
determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in
0.5 mm increments. Basic Operation(P. 111)
Setting Value
A value with a "+" sign
A value with a "-" sign
Long Edge
Short Edge
Left edge of paper
Top edge of paper
Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper
<Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>
Irrespective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of "0.5 mm" for all print jobs.
-50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the
combination of adjustment direction and printing side Specify the offset value <Apply>
(
)
343
Setting Menu List
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.
Entering the setting value
For <Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a
value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,
specify a value with a "-" sign. Basic Operation(P. 111)
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>
<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
<Auto Skip Error>/<Auto Error Skip>
Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will
be skipped and printing can continue. Normally, set this item to <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Skip>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Auto Skip Error>/<Auto Error
Select <Off> or <On>
<Timeout>
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data
reception interruption.
5 to 15
to 300 (sec.)
<Menu>
period
<Function Settings>
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Timeout>
Set the time
)
<Personality>
Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.
344
Setting Menu List
<Auto>
<PS>*1
<PCL>
<PDF>*1
<XPS>*1
<Imaging>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Personality>
Select the
Personality mode
<Escape Tray Mode>
Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when the appropriate paper is not loaded in the
paper drawer while Auto Select Paper is enabled.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Escape Tray Mode>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-Sd>/<Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided>
Specify whether to process the last page using 1-sided printing when processing a document containing an odd
number of pages using 2-sided printing.
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Sd>/<Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided>
<Speed Priority>
Processes the last page using 1-sided printing.
<Print Side Priority>
Also processes the last page using 2-sided printing.
345
<Printer Settings>
<Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-
Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Setting Menu List
When a document containing an even number of pages is ended with 1-sided
printing
● When <Speed Priority> is selected, the last page that is blank or unprintable is processed using 1sided printing even if the document consists of the even number of pages.
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo
● If <Speed Priority> is selected and the last page is processed using 1-sided printing, the page
orientation or print side may differ from that of other pages. In such a case, select <Print Side
Priority>.
<Prioritize MP Tray>/<Prioritize Multi-Purpose Tray>
Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is
selected, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both
the multi-purpose tray and paper drawer.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Prioritize MP Tray>/<Prioritize
Select <Off> or <On>
● This setting is only available when <Escape Tray Mode> is set to <Off>.
<Check Paper Size in Tray>
Specify whether to cancel the printing when the paper size in the loaded paper is different from the one in the
printer driver.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Tray>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Check Paper Size in
Select <Off> or <On>
<Recovery Printing>
If printing is interrupted due to an error such as a paper jam, printing ordinarily restarts from the page on
which the error occurred after the error has been resolved. When <Off> is selected, the page on which an error
occurred is skipped, and printing restarts from the next page.
<Off>
<On>
346
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Recovery Printing>
Select
<Off> or <On>
When <Off> is selected
● The page may not be printed depending on the timing at which an error occurred.
● If an error occurs during 2-sided printing, both of the corresponding pages may not be printed.
<UFR II>
You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select a method used to reproduce halftones. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR
II> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image
reproduction method
347
Select the halftone
Setting Menu List
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a finer print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or fine line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
Save>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
<PCL>
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
348
<UFR II>
<Paper
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Paper Save>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<Orientation>
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Orientation>
Select
<Portrait> or <Landscape>
<Font Number>
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 405)
LBP215x
0
to 104
LBP214dw / LBP212dw
0
to 54
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Number>
<Printer>
Select the font number
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PCL>
<Font
)
<Point Size> *1
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a
proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00
<Menu>
to 999.75 (point)
<Function Settings>
the point size
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Point Size>
Specify
)
<Pitch> *1
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a fixed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
349
Setting Menu List
0.44 to 10.00
to 99.99 (cpi)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
pitch value
<Apply> (
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Pitch>
Specify the
)
<Form Lines>
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according
to the settings specified in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64
to 128 (lines)
<Menu>
Lines>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Specify the number of lines
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PCL>
<Form
)
<Character Code>
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specified setting
is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specified in <Font Number>.
LBP215x
<ARABIC8>
<DESKTOP>
<GREEK8>
<HEBREW7>
<HEBREW8>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOCYR>
<ISOGRK>
<ISOHEB>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC851>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC862>
<PC864>
<PC866>
<PC8DN>
<PC8GRK>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMATH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINARB>
<WINBALT>
<WINCYR>
<WINGRK>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
350
Setting Menu List
<WINL5>
LBP214dw / LBP212dw
<DESKTOP>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<ISOL9>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC852>
<PC858>
<PC8DN>
<PC8TK>
<PIFONT>
<PSMATH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<ROMAN9>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINBALT>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
<WINL5>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC1004>
<PC775>
<Menu>
Code>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Character
Select the character code
<Custom Paper>
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension>
and <Y dimension>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Paper>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<Unit of Measure> *1
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
351
<PCL>
<Custom
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Measure>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Unit of
<PCL>
<X
<PCL>
<Y
Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>
<X dimension> *1
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 215
(mm)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
dimension>
<Printer>
Specify the dimension
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
)
<Y dimension> *1
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 355
(mm)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
dimension>
<Printer>
Specify the dimension
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
)
<Append CR to LF>
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
<Yes>
<No>
352
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
LF>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Append CR to
Select <Yes> or <No>
<Enlarge A4 Print Width>
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of
Letter size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Width>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Enlarge A4 Print
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select a method used to reproduce halftones. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones>
<Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select the halftone reproduction method
353
Setting Menu List
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a finer print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or fine line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
<BarDIMM> *1
This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit. If <Enable> is selected, the
machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable>
is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.
<Disable>
<Enable>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<BarDIMM>
Select
<Disable> or <Enable>
● To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not
printing bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular
print jobs may be reduced.
● The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.
<FreeScape> *1
Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does
not support the standard Escape Code.
354
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<~>
<">
<#>
<$>
</>
<\>
<?>
<{>
<}>
<|>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<FreeScape>
Select
an escape code
● This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.
<PS> *1
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Job Timeout>
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not finished within
the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.
0
to 3600 (sec.)
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
Specify the seconds for job timeout
<Printer Settings>
<Apply> (
<PS>
<Job Timeout>
)
<Print PS Errors>
This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Print PS Errors>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
355
Setting Menu List
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select a method used to reproduce halftones. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
Select the type of image
Select the
halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Gradation>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<High Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
356
Setting Menu List
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PS>
<Grayscale Conversion>
Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<Imaging Settings>
You can change the print settings that will apply when printing image files (JPEG/TIFF).
<Halftones>
You can change the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the
lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Gradation>
<Resolution>
<High Resolution>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Halftones>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select the halftone reproduction method
357
<Imaging Settings>
Setting Menu List
<Gradation>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data such
as photo image data.
<Resolution>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing
gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<PDF> *1
You can change settings for PDF files.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size
enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Paper Size>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit
<PDF>
<Enlarge Print Area>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
● If you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts
come out partially smudged depending on the original.
<N on 1>
Specify whether to shrink multiple pages and print them on one page in such arrangement that the first
page is positioned at top left. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
358
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<N on 1>
Select the
number of pages to be combined
<Print Comments>
Specify whether to print comments. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF files will be printed.
<Off>
<Auto>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Print Comments>
Select <Off> or <Auto>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select a method used to reproduce halftones. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
the halftone reproduction method
359
Select the type of image
Select
Setting Menu List
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Gradation>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<High Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Conversion>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<PDF>
<Grayscale
Select the type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC
system).
<Uniform RGB>
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
360
Setting Menu List
<XPS> *1
You can change settings for XPS files.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter
and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select a method used to reproduce halftones. This option can be specified for each image type in any one
document.
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer
Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>
Select the type of image
Select
the halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Setting value
<Resolution>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
361
Setting Menu List
<Gradation>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<High Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Grayscale Conversion>
Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.
<Text>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Graphics>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Image>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Conversion>
<Printer>
Select the type of image
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Grayscale
Select the type of grayscale conversion
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
Type of grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
<NTSC>
Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the
NTSC system).
<Uniform RGB>
362
Setting Menu List
Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only
brightness as the reference.
<Paper Save>
Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Paper Save>
Select
<Off> or <On>
<Compressed Image Output>
Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insufficient
memory during printing.
<Output>
<Display Error>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
Output>
Select <Output> or <Display Error>
<Printer>
<Printer Settings>
<XPS>
<Compressed Image
<Output>
Continues printing regardless of how much the image quality has degraded.
<Display Error>
If the image quality has degraded significantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.
<Network> *2
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected over the network.
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>
363
Setting Menu List
<PCL6 (V4)>
<PS>*1
<USB>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB.
<UFR II>
<UFR II (V4)>
<PCL6>
<PCL6 (V4)>
<PS>*1
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>
or <USB> Select a page description language <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
Select <Network>
<UFR II>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.
<UFR II (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
<PCL6>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PCL6 (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PS>
Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.
364
Setting Menu List
<Receive>
2822-05S
All the settings related to receiving I-Faxes are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Common Settings>(P. 365)
<I-Fax Settings>(P. 365)
<Common Settings>
Specify operations that are to be performed when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low.
<Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>
When I-Faxes are received while the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low, they will not be
printed. However, if this function is enabled, you can still continue printing even if the amount remaining in the
toner cartridges is running low.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Receive>
<Common Settings>
Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>
<Continue Print. When Cart.
<On>
● When this function is enabled, the print of I-Faxes may be faded or blurry. Received documents will
not be stored, so you need to ask the sender to resend the document if it is illegible.
<I-Fax Settings>
Configure settings to print received I-Fax documents.
<Print on Both Sides>
Prints received document on both sides of paper.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Receive>
365
<I-Fax Settings>
<Print on Both Sides>
<On>
Setting Menu List
<RX Print Size>
Specify the paper size to be used for printing.
<A4>
<LTR>
<LGL>
<FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
<OFICIO>
<LETTER (Government)>/<Government-LTR>
<LEGAL (Government)>/<Government-LGL>
<LEGAL (India)>/<India-LGL>
<FOOLSCAP (Australia)>/<AUS-FOOLSCAP>
<OFICIO (Brazil)>/<Brazil-OFICIO>
<OFICIO (Mexico)>/<Mexico-OFICIO>
<Menu>
<Function Settings>
<Receive>
paper size
366
<I-Fax Settings>
<RX Print Size>
Select the
Setting Menu List
<Access Files>
2822-05U
All the settings related to printing stored files are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
<Common Settings>(P. 367)
<Memory Media Settings>(P. 370)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
<Common Settings>
Configure the default settings for memory media print.
<Access Stored Files Settings>
You can change the settings to print files in a USB memory device and the method for displaying them.
<Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
You can change the default settings associated with memory media print. The settings configured here are
used as the default settings of the memory media print function. Changing the Default Settings for
Functions(P. 152)
<Paper>
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Drawer 1>
<Drawer 2>*
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<2-Sided Printing>
<Off>
<Book Type>
<Calendar Type>
<Print Quality>
<Density>*
17 Levels
<Fine Adjust>
<High>/<Medium>/<Low>
17 levels
<Toner Save>
<Off>
<On>
367
Setting Menu List
<Image Refinement>
<Off>
<On>
<Resolution>
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
<Brightness>
Five Levels
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<Original Type>
<Photo Priority>
<Text Priority>
<Halftones>
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
< Set PDF Details>
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<6 on 1>
<8 on 1>
<9 on 1>
<16 on 1>
<Print Range>
<All Pages>
<Specified Pages>
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
<Off>
<On>
<Enlarge Print Area>
<Off>
<On>
<Print Comments>
<Off>
<Auto>
<Other Settings>
<Halftones>
<Resolution/Gradation>
<Text>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
368
Setting Menu List
<Graphics>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Image>
<Resolution>
<Gradation>
<High Resolution>
<Grayscale Conversion>
<sRGB>
<NTSC>
<Uniform RGB>
<Default Display Settings>
Select Preview/Details as the method for displaying files in a USB memory device.
<Preview>
<Details>
<Menu>
Settings>
<Function Settings>
<Access Files>
<Default Display Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select the method for displaying
<Preview>
Displays a preview image.
<Details>
Displays file names and dates in list form.
<File Sort Default Settings>
Select whether to display files in a USB memory device in ascending or descending order of file name or date.
<Name (Ascending)>
<Name (Descending)>
<Date/Time (Ascending)>
<Date/Time (Descending)>
<Menu>
Settings>
<Function Settings>
<Access Files>
<File Sort Default Settings>
369
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select the order of files that are displayed
Setting Menu List
<File Name Display Format>
Select whether to display short or long text for file names that are stored in a USB memory device.
<Short File Name>
<Long File Name>
<Menu>
Settings>
<Function Settings>
<Access Files>
<File Name Display Format>
<Common Settings>
<Access Stored Files
Select <Short File Name> or <Long File Name>
<Short File Name>
Shortens a file name to as few as eight characters. To distinguish files that have similar names, numbers such as
"~1" or "~2" are added at the end of the file names.
<Long File Name>
Displays a file name up to 40 characters.
● The number of characters described above does not include the characters in file extensions, such as ".jpg."
<Memory Media Settings>
Specify whether to enable or disable the functions of a USB memory device.
<Use Print Function>
Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine.
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 256)
<Off>
<On>
370
Setting Menu List
<Secure Print>
2822-05W
Specify whether to enable or disable Secure Print (
with a dagger ( ).
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169) ). Default settings are marked
<Use Secure Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Restrict Printer Jobs>
<Off>
<On>
<Secure Print Deletion Time>
10 to 30
to 240 (min.)
371
Setting Menu List
<Management Settings>
2822-05X
Item
Description
<User Management>(P. 373)
You can configure the settings for managing users of the machine.
<Device Management>(P. 375)
You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as
various data required when using the machine functions.
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update You can configure the settings related to the Remote UI and software
Firmware>(P. 378)
available for the machine.
<Data Management>(P. 380)
You can configure settings to utilize data such as machine settings data or
perform data initialization.
<Security Settings>(P. 382)
You can configure the settings related to the user authentication function,
password, and encryption.
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 284)
372
Setting Menu List
<User Management>
2822-05Y
All the settings related to user management of the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked
with a dagger ( ).
<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 373)
<Department ID Management>(P. 373)
<System Manager Information Settings>
Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network> and <Management
Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 210)
<System Manager ID and PIN>
Enter a number for the System Manager ID and PIN.
<System Manager ID>
<System Manager PIN>
<System Manager Name>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
<Department ID Management>
Set the Department ID Management function to control access to the machine by using multiple IDs.
Department ID Management(P. 212)
Setting the
Touch panel model
<Department ID Management>
<Off>
<On>
<Allow Print Jobs (Unknown IDs)>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
● You can select <Register/Edit> to register department IDs and edit the settings of the registered IDs.
● You can select <Count Mngt.> to check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date
on a department ID basis.
373
Setting Menu List
Black and white LCD model
● Specify whether to enable the Department ID Management. Use the Remote UI to perform department ID
registration or check the machine usage status by department ID.
374
Setting Menu List
<Device Management>
2822-060
All the settings related to management of information for the hardware and operations, as well as about management
of data required when using the machine functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Device Information Settings>(P. 375)
<Select Country/Region>(P. 375)
<Display Job Log>(P. 376)
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 376)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 377)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
<Device Information Settings>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
<Device Name>
<Location>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Device Information
Settings> Select <Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location (
Text(P. 116) )
Entering
<Apply>
<Select Country/Region> *1 *2
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
<Austria (AT)>
<Belarus (BY)>
<Belgium (BE)>
<Czech Republic (CZ)>
<Denmark (DK)>
<Egypt (EG)>
<Finland (FI)>
<France (FR)>
<Germany (DE)>
<Greece (GR)>
<Netherlands (NL)>
<Norway (NO)>
<Poland (PL)>
<Portugal (PT)>
<Russia (RU)>
<Saudi Arabia (SA)>
<Slovenia (SI)>
<South Africa (ZA)>
<Spain (ES)>
<Sweden (SE)>
375
Setting Menu List
<Hungary (HU)>
<Ireland (IE)>
<Switzerland (CH)>
<Ukraine (UA)>
<Great Britain (GB)>
<Italy (IT)>
<Jordan (JO)>
<Luxembourg (LU)>
<Menu>
<Other>
<Management Settings>
<Device Management>
<Select Country/Region>
Select
a country or region
<Display Job Log>
Select whether to display printing logs on the machine display.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Management Settings> <Device Management>
<OK> Restart the machine
<Display Job Log>
Select <Off>
<Display Job Log>
Select <Off>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
or <On>
<Management Settings>
Restart the machine
<Device Management>
<Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls.
Info (RUI/Toner Status)>
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>/<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
<Off>
<On>
<Toner Status Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.>
<Off>
<On>
376
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Consumables
Information (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)> Specify the settings
<Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>/<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the
Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing
toner cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the
machine.
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management>
Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management>
Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
377
<Notify to Check Paper
Setting Menu List
<License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmware>
2822-061
All the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine as well as about Register License
are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Register License>(P. 378)
<Remote UI Settings>(P. 378)
<Update Firmware>(P. 379)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
● Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
<Register License> *1*2
Enter the license key for a system option that can be used on the machine.
License Registration(P. 490)
<Remote UI Settings> *1
Configure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web
browser.
<Remote UI>/<Use Remote UI>
Select whether to use the Remote UI ( Disabling Remote UI(P. 258) ). When using Remote UI, you can also
specify whether to use the TLS encrypted communication ( Configuring the Key and Certificate for
TLS(P. 232) ).
Touch panel model
<Use Remote UI>
<Off>
<On>
<Use TLS>
<Off>
<On>
Black and white LCD model
<Off>
<On>
<Use TLS>
<Off>
378
Setting Menu List
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other> <Remote UI Settings>
Select <On> in <Use Remote UI> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use
TLS> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
<Remote UI>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI
Settings> <Use Remote UI> <On> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Restrict Access>/<Remote UI Access Security Settings>
Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a
common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 218)
<Off>
<On>
<Remote UI Access PIN>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>
<Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access>/<Remote UI Access Security Settings> <On> Enter
a PIN
<Apply>
Enter the PIN (Confirm)
<Apply>
<Update Firmware> *1
Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine.
Firmware(P. 280)
<Via PC>
<Via Internet>
<Version Information>
379
Updating the
Setting Menu List
<Data Management>
2822-062
The settings for utilizing the machine settings and for initializing data are listed with descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
<Import/Export>(P. 380)
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>/<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>(P. 381)
<Initialize Key and Certificate>(P. 381)
<Initialize Menu>(P. 381)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.
<Import/Export> *
You can import and export various settings of the machine by using a USB memory device. For more information
about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see Using a USB
Memory Device(P. 156) .
<Import>
<Export>
Import
<Menu>
<Yes>
<Management Settings> <Data Management>
Enter the password <Apply>
<Import/Export>
<Import>
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export>
Enter the password <Apply> Enter the password (Confirm) <Apply>
<Export>
Export
When import is executed
● The machine automatically restarts after the import process has finished.
380
Setting Menu List
<Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.>/<Enable Product Extended Survey
Program>
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey
Prog.> Select <Off> or <On> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management>
Program> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Enable Product Extended Survey
<Initialize Key and Certificate> *
Select to restore [Key and Certificate Settings] and [CA Certificate Settings] to the factory defaults.
and Certificate(P. 283)
Initializing Key
<Initialize Menu> *
Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 283)
<Preferences>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Function Settings>
<Management Settings>
<Initialize All>
381
Setting Menu List
<Security Settings>
2822-063
All the settings related to the authentication function and encryption are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
<Authentication/Password Settings>(P. 382)
<Encryption Settings>(P. 383)
<Authentication/Password Settings>
You can reinforce the security of the authentication function.
<Authentication Function Settings>
Configure the security functions for user authentication.
<Lockout>/<Lockout Settings>
When a user has failed user authentication, specify whether to disable the user from temporarily logging in
to the machine (lockout). When <On> is selected, specify how many consecutive times failures are permitted
before lockout is activated and also the time required before a user can log in again after lockout.
<Enable Lockout>
<Off>
<On>
<Lockout Threshold>
1
to 10 (time(s))
<Lockout Period>
1
to 60 (min.)
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings>
<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout> Select <On> in <Enable Lockout> Specify
each setting item <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password
Settings> <Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout Settings> <Enable
Lockout> <On> Specify each setting item Restart the machine
● This option is not applied to login using the department ID.
382
Setting Menu List
<Encryption Settings>
Configure a setting for disabling a weak encryption or the key and certification using a weak encryption.
<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>/<Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption>
<Off>
<On>
<Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption>
<Off>
<On>
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> Select <On>
in <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> Select <Off> or <On> in <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>
<Apply> <OK> Restart the machine
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> <Prohibit Use
of Weak Encryption> <On> <Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
383
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 385
Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 387
Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 388
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 389
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 390
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 394
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 395
Adjusting Image Quality ................................................................................................................................... 397
Adjusting Print Density ................................................................................................................................. 398
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 399
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 401
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 402
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 406
384
Maintenance
Maintenance
2822-064
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.
◼ Basic Cleaning
Regular Cleaning(P. 387)
◼ Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 394)
Consumables(P. 406)
◼ Adjusting and Managing the Machine
385
Maintenance
Relocating the Machine(P. 395)
Adjusting Image Quality(P. 397)
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 401)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 402)
386
Maintenance
Regular Cleaning
2822-065
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Cleaning the Exterior(P. 388)
Internal fixing assembly
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
387
Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior
2822-066
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
● Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
● To locate the ventilation slots, see
Front Side(P. 88) .
3
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
388
Maintenance
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
2822-067
Dirt may adhere to the fixing assembly inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean
the fixing assembly, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the fixing assembly when the
machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the fixing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set
the paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray before performing the following procedure. Loading
Paper(P. 121)
● Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sufficient toner cartridge remaining
beforehand.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 394)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
5
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <OK>
Select <Start>.
➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press
Home screen.
389
to return to the
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
2822-068
The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner
cartridges on the display ( Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 394) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 390)
When Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 391)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 406) ) or replace the current toner cartridge
with a new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391) ).
<Prepare cartridge.>
This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
● When printing, you can continue printing the original.
● If this message is displayed while an I-Fax document is being received, the machine does not perform
printing so that unclear print is avoided. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner
cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.
Low> to <On>. <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.
Low>(P. 365)
Specify when this message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message. <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>/<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep.
Notif.>(P. 290)
<End of cartridge lifetime.>/<Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.>
This message notifies you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you
replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.
390
Maintenance
When Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed. Procedure for Replacing the Toner
Cartridge(P. 391)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven
Partially faded
Toner smudges and splatters appear
Uneven density
Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Follow the procedure below to replace the toner cartridge.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
White Spots Appear
391
Maintenance
3
4
5
Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective case.
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge.
Install the toner cartridge.
● Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
6
Close the front cover.
392
Maintenance
LINKS
Consumables(P. 406)
393
Maintenance
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
2822-069
Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check
whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Status Monitor> (
<Cartridge Level>
)
<Device Information>/<Device Status>
<Cartridge Information>/
Checking the amount remaining in the toner cartridges
● The displayed amount remaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the
actual amount.
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
Consumables(P. 406)
394
Maintenance
Relocating the Machine
2822-06A
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
● Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB keyboard*
USB cable*
LAN cable*
3
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.
4
Pull out the paper drawer.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
● Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
5
Close all the open covers and multi-purpose tray, and move the machine to a new
location.
● The machine is heavy (
Main Unit(P. 475) ). Do not try hard to carry the machine.
395
Maintenance
● Position yourself toward the front side of the machine and hold the lift handles, then lift up the machine. If
you have attached the optional cassette feeding module, leave the cassette feeding module on the floor and
move it after moving the main unit of the machine.
6
Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
● For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started."
Their Contents(P. 492)
396
Manuals and
Maintenance
Adjusting Image Quality
2822-06C
If the print results are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or skewed printouts, try the
adjustments below.
◼ Density Adjustment
When the print results are too dark or too light, you can adjust the density.
Adjusting Print Density(P. 398)
◼ Adjust Print Position
You can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.
Adjusting Print Position(P. 399)
397
Maintenance
Adjusting Print Density
2822-06F
When the print results are too dark or too light, you can adjust the density.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Printer Density>.
4
Adjust the density.
5
Press <Apply> (
).
398
Maintenance
Adjusting Print Position
2822-06H
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in increments of 0.1
mm.
Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,
specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse
direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.
<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust
Horizontally (Back Side)>
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically
(Back Side)>
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 104)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Adjust Image Quality>.
3
Select <Adjust Print Position>.
4
Select the paper source.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
5
Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side.
399
Maintenance
6
Set an adjustment value.
7
Press <Apply> (
).
Adjusting the Print Position for All Print Jobs
● You can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for
all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.5 mm increments
between -50.0 mm and +50.0 mm. <Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge>(P. 343)
400
Maintenance
Viewing the Counter Value
2822-06J
You can check the total number of pages printed by the machine. The number of printouts includes printouts of the
memory media print and the list as well as printouts of data from computers.
Touch Panel Model
<Check Counter>
Check the number of pages printed
<101: Total 1>
Displays the total number of pages printed.
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in black and white.
<114: Total 1 (2-Sided)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in two-sided printing mode.
● <Monitoring Service> enables communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item
enables information about the machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server
connected to the machine.
● <Check Dev. Config.> enables you to check the optional units installed on the machine.
Black and White LCD Model
<Device Status>
<Check Counter>
Select the item you want to check
number of pages printed
<101: Total 1>
Displays the total number of pages printed.
<113: Total (Black & White/Small)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in black and white.
<114: Total 1 (2-Sided)>
Displays the total number of pages printed in two-sided printing mode.
401
Check the
Maintenance
Printing Reports and Lists
2822-06K
You can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>
and machine settings.
Configuring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists(P. 402)
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID(P. 402)
Printing Lists of Settings(P. 403)
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 404)
Configuring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists
You can perform 2-sided printing of reports and lists.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
Output>
<On>
<Report Settings>
<Default Settings for Report
<Apply>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
Sided Printing>
<Report Settings>
<Default Settings for Report Output>
<2-
<On>
Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID
Department ID Management Report
When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each
<Department ID> by printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can
better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that
the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select
<Start>
Black and white LCD model
402
Maintenance
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Department ID Management Report>
the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that
<Yes>
Printing Lists of Settings
You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 286) ) as well as the content that has been
registered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the
firmware version and the paper size and type registered in the machine.
Touch panel model
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and
select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine
<Yes>
● The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management
Settings. To check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec
Policy List.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<IPSec Policy List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
403
Maintenance
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<IPSec Policy List>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine
You can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS
mode.
Eco Report
You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report
includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Eco Report>
Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Eco Report>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
● The amount of power consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where
the machine is used.
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Consumables Status Report>
Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Consumables Status Report>
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
404
Check that the size
<Yes>
Maintenance
PCL Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<PCL Font List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<PCL Font List>
Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
<Yes>
PS Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<PS Font List>
Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<PS Font List>
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
Check that the size and type of
<Yes>
Cartridge Log Report
You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.
Touch panel model
<Menu>
<Output Report>
<Print List>
<Cartridge Log Report>
Check that the size and
type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>
Black and white LCD model
<Menu>
<Output Reports>
<Print List>
<Cartridge Log Report>
type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
405
Check that the size and
<Yes>
Maintenance
Consumables
2822-06L
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in
this machine. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
● To handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.
● Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
● Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner
cartridges.
◼ Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
● Average yield*
1,600 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.7 kg
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 052
Canon Cartridge 052 H
● Average yield*
3,100 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.7 kg
● Average yield*
9,200 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 1.0 kg
* The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
406
Maintenance
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
● When replacing toner cartridges, see
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390) .
407
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 409
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 411
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 412
Printing Problems ......................................................................................................................................... 416
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 419
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 421
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 432
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 434
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 435
Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 436
Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 449
Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 454
Paper Jams in the Main Unit ......................................................................................................................... 456
Paper Jams in a Paper Source ....................................................................................................................... 462
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 464
408
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2822-06R
1660-0AE
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.
◼ Common Problems
This section describes how to take action when you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning.
Problems(P. 411)
Common
◼ When You Cannot Print Properly
This section describes how to take action when printing results are not satisfactory or the paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 419)
◼ A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) is Displayed
This section describes how to take action when a message or error code (three digits) appears on the display.
Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed(P. 435)
◼ Clearing Paper Jams
This section describes how to take action when a paper is jammed.
409
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
A
Troubleshooting
◼ When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 464) to find out where to contact.
410
Troubleshooting
Common Problems
2822-06S
If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
● If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 492)
Are the LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
● Check whether these cables are connected correctly.
Parts and Their Functions(P. 87)
Is sleep mode activated?
● If you leave the machine unattended for a specific period of time, it enters sleep mode for power
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press
.
Is any message displayed on the screen?
● If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 436)
If a problem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
Printing Problems(P. 416)
411
Troubleshooting
Installation/Settings Problems
2822-06U
See
Common Problems(P. 411) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 412)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 415)
Problem with the Print Server(P. 415)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
● The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
● Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 257)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 258)
● If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen and
that the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Home Screen(P. 104)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
● If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected firmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
● Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to
set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 222)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 315)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 316)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 316)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
● The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 40)
● When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 413)
412
Troubleshooting
You are unsure of the set IP address.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a
wireless LAN.
● Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 25)
You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be
connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.
● Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
● Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
● Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
● If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
*A
mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 413)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup
router is connected to a network).
● If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
● If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
● If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
● Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?
● Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
● Is the wireless router turned on?
413
Troubleshooting
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
● Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
● Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
● If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
● Is the machine too far from the wireless router?
● Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
● Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36) ).
● ANY connection refusal* is activated.
● The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
● The stealth mode is activated.
*A
function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
● The MAC address packet filtering is set.
414
Troubleshooting
● When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
● Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
● If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
You cannot find the print server to connect to.
● Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
● Is the print server running?
● Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
● Is [Network discovery] enabled?
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 499)
You cannot connect to a shared printer.
● On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 500)
415
Troubleshooting
Printing Problems
2822-06W
See
Common Problems(P. 411) also.
Printing results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls.
When You
Cannot Print Properly(P. 419)
You cannot print.
● Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 501)
If the problems persist, check the items that suit your operational environment.
Wireless LAN connection
● Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
● If the connection is poor, try the following.
- Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to
be at least five channels apart.
- If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
● If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 47)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 504)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
● As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 502)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 222)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 315)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 316)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
416
Troubleshooting
● Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Wired LAN connection
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 502)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 222)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 315)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 316)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 316)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
● Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer
driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 502)
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
● Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 503)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Connect to another USB port on the computer.
● Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
● Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server(P. 415)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 81)
● Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
● Are you printing with the lpr command? To continuously print PDF data using the lpr command, print jobs
one by one at intervals according to the <Timeout> setting.
<Timeout>(P. 344)
● Has an error occurred? Check the job log.
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 165)
417
Troubleshooting
Printing seems to be slow. *
● Disabling Secure Print is recommended if you are not using it.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 170)
* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
It takes a long time before printing starts.
● Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
418
Troubleshooting
When You Cannot Print Properly
2822-06X
If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
◼ Problems with Image Quality
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Bottom Edge of Printouts(P. 421)
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory(P. 421)
Smudges Appear on
Printouts(P. 421)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear(P. 424)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 424)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven(P. 427)
Printouts Are Grayish(P. 428)
419
Afterimages Appear in Blank
Areas(P. 423)
A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P. 426)
White Spots Appear(P. 428)
Troubleshooting
Black Spots Appear(P. 430)
Reverse Side of Paper is
Smudged(P. 430)
◼ Problems with Printout Paper
Paper Creases(P. 432)
◼ Problems with Paper Feed
Printouts Are Skewed(P. 434)
Printed Barcode Cannot Be
Read(P. 431)
Paper Creases or Curls(P. 432)
Paper Curls(P. 432)
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly(P. 434)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 434)
420
Troubleshooting
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
2822-06Y
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine first.
Cleaning(P. 387)
Regular
Smudge Marks Appear on the Bottom Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type. Also, set the paper size and type
correctly.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Do you print data without margins?
● This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings]
[Expand Print Region and Print]
Smudges Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
421
[Off]
Troubleshooting
Do smudges appear when using the machine in an environment with low
humidity?
● Change the setting for <Low Humidity Mode>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Low Humidity Mode>(P. 330)
● If <Low Humidity Mode> is specified, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used in an
environment with high humidity.
Do smudges appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the
operating environment?
● Change the setting of <Correct Blurry Image>. The improvement effect is weakest with <Mode 1> and
strongest with <Mode 4>. Try the adjustment starting with <Mode 1>.
<Correct Blurry Image>(P. 332)
● Setting a stronger improvement effect may result in lighter print density or slower printing speed. It may
also result in less sharp edges and rougher details.
● If [Barcode Adjustment Mode] in the printer driver is specified, the <Correct Blurry Image> setting is
disabled.
Is the machine installed in an environment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
● When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
422
Troubleshooting
Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Do afterimages appear when you print on large size paper after printing on
small size paper?
● Change the setting for <Reduce Ghosting 1>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Reduce Ghosting 1>(P. 330)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
Do ghost images appear in the same page?
● Change the setting for <High Humidity Mode>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<High Humidity Mode>(P. 330)
● If you set to <On>, the print density may vary depending on the ambient humidity.
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
● Regardless of the displayed toner level, the toner cartridge may have reached the end of its lifetime due to
the machine's environmental conditions and the deteriorated materials in the cartridge. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
423
Troubleshooting
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Do toner smudges and splatters appear when using the machine in an
environment with low humidity?
● Change the setting for <Low Humidity Mode>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
<Mode 1>. First try with <Mode 1>.
<Low Humidity Mode>(P. 330)
● If <Low Humidity Mode> is specified, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used in an
environment with high humidity.
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
● Regardless of the displayed toner level, the toner cartridge may have reached the end of its lifetime due to
the machine's environmental conditions and the deteriorated materials in the cartridge. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
Printouts Are Faded
424
Troubleshooting
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Is the machine installed in an environment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
● When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Are the printouts faded when you print on envelopes?
● Printouts may be faded when you print on envelopes with rough surfaces. Setting <Rough Surface
Envelope Mode> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Rough Surface Envelope Mode>(P. 328)
If you set <Rough Surface Envelope Mode> to <On>
● The <Paper Curl Correction> setting will be disabled.
● The printing speed may be slower.
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
● Regardless of the displayed toner level, the toner cartridge may have reached the end of its lifetime due to
the machine's environmental conditions and the deteriorated materials in the cartridge. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
425
Troubleshooting
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
● This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings]
[Expand Print Region and Print]
[Off]
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Is the machine installed in an environment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
● When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
426
Troubleshooting
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
Is the machine installed in an environment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
● When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Do black horizontal streaks appear in the leading edge of paper?
● Change the setting of <Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks>(P. 331)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
427
Troubleshooting
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
● Regardless of the displayed toner level, the toner cartridge may have reached the end of its lifetime due to
the machine's environmental conditions and the deteriorated materials in the cartridge. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
Printouts Are Grayish
Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?
● Install the machine in an appropriate location.
Installation(P. 3)
Relocating the Machine(P. 395)
● Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
White Spots Appear
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
428
Troubleshooting
Does a void appear at the center of dark text or lines?
● Change the setting for <High Humidity Mode>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<High Humidity Mode>(P. 330)
● If you set to <On>, the print density may vary depending on the ambient humidity.
Is the machine installed in an environment where the temperature changes
rapidly and drastically?
● When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation
occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If <Control Condensation> is set to <On>,
condensation inside the machine will be removed. Condensation removal may be performed automatically
due to temperature change.
<Control Condensation>(P. 333)
● While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation
removal.
● The setting for <Auto Shutdown Time> is unavailable when <Control Condensation> is set to <On>.
Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
● Change the setting for <High Humidity Mode>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<High Humidity Mode>(P. 330)
● If you set to <On>, the print density may vary depending on the ambient humidity.
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as
necessary.
● Regardless of the displayed toner level, the toner cartridge may have reached the end of its lifetime due to
the machine's environmental conditions and the deteriorated materials in the cartridge. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 390)
429
Troubleshooting
Black Spots Appear
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged
Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?
● Check to make sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
When you print a halftone image such as a photograph on a small size piece
of heavy paper, do streaks appear on the paper?
● Change the setting for <Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr>. Setting this item to <On> may solve the
problem.
<Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr>(P. 329)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
430
Troubleshooting
Printed Barcode Cannot Be Read
Are you using a small barcode or a barcode consisting of thick lines?
● Enlarge the barcode.
● If the direction of lines in the barcode is perpendicular to the paper output direction, turn the image 90
degrees to make the lines parallel to the paper output direction.
● If the problem persists even after performing the above operation, change the mode by using [Barcode
Adjustment Mode] in the printer driver. The improvement effect is weakest with [Mode 1] and strongest
with [Mode 5]. Try the adjustment starting with [Mode 1].
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings]
[Barcode Adjustment Mode]
Select the mode
● If the improvement effect is stronger, the print density becomes lighter.
● [Barcode Adjustment Mode] may not be displayed depending on the printer driver settings. For
information about how to display it, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual
website.
● If [Barcode Adjustment Mode] is specified, the <Correct Blurry Image> setting is disabled. In addition,
specifying [Mode 4] or [Mode 5] results in slower printing.
431
Troubleshooting
Paper Creases or Curls
2822-070
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
● If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Does this problem occur when printing on plain paper or thin paper?
● Change the setting for <Paper Wrinkle Correction>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Paper Wrinkle Correction>(P. 328)
● If you set to <On>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Paper Curls
432
Troubleshooting
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
● Change the setting for <Paper Curl Correction>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Paper Curl Correction>(P. 329)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
● Change the setting of <Paper Type> to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is
<Plain 1>, change it to <Thin 1>.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Available Paper(P. 478)
● Change the setting for <Paper Curl Correction>. Setting to <On> may solve the problem.
<Paper Curl Correction>(P. 329)
● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.
433
Troubleshooting
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
2822-071
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
● Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.
● Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
● Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Available Paper(P. 478)
Loading Paper(P. 121)
● Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
● There are cases where the paper does not load properly depending on its thickness. If this occurs, reverse
the paper orientation, or flip the paper over.
434
Troubleshooting
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error
Code) Is Displayed
2822-072
When a message appears on the machine's display, or a number (error code) prefixed with "#" appears, see the
following sections to check the solution.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 436)
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 449)
435
Troubleshooting
Countermeasures for Each Message
2822-073
A message appears on the display when operation becomes impossible due to occurrence of an error during printing
or memory capacity depletion. Find out more information about messages in the following list.
A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use. The amount in the
cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 406)
Cannot analyze the authentication server certificate.
The authentication server certificate may be invalid, or the certificate may be in a format that the
printer does not support.
● Check the authentication server certificate.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
Cannot find the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specific period of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 29)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 31)
An SSID or network key of a wireless router was entered manually, but the entry was incorrect.
● Check the SSID and network key, and enter the correct ones again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
● If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cannot print RX data.
Received documents cannot be printed due to some specific situation.
● Check if there has occurred one of the following situations. If messages including causes and solutions
appear on the display, check the contents.
436
Troubleshooting
A cover is open.
There is no paper loaded.
The paper is jammed.
The toner cartridge is consumed.
An error has occurred.
Cannot recognize the image.
An image which cannot be previewed was selected in Memory Media Print.
● When the machine has insufficient memory space, preview cannot be displayed. Even JPEG or TIFF images
may not be displayed.
Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
Cartridge Communication Error A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be
in use.
A toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
● Re-install the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 406)
Change the authentication password.
The password has expired.
● Set a new password.
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
437
Troubleshooting
● Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
Could not connect.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
● Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briefly.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
An error occurred when connecting in Access Point Mode.
● Set the IP address to other than "192.168.22.xx." If you still cannot connect, check the subnet mask
settings. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 41)
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
● If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
Could not connect. Device will restart.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
● Restart the machine, and then, perform <Easy Connection via PC> again.
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 302)
An error occurred during the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode).
● Restart the machine, and then, perform <Easy Connection via PC> again.
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 302)
Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the
access point has been reached./Could not connect. Max connections to
access point reached
The machine attempted to connect to a wireless LAN router to which the maximum number of devices
were already connected.
438
Troubleshooting
● Decrease the number of devices (clients) that are connected to the wireless LAN router. For information on
the maximum number of devices that can connect, see the instruction manual for the wireless LAN router
or contact the manufacturer.
Could not connect using Easy Connection via PC. The device will restart.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
● Restart the machine, and then, perform <Easy Connection via PC> again.
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 302)
An error occurred during the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode).
● Restart the machine, and then, perform <Easy Connection via PC> again.
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 302)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
then configure the settings again.
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
● Restart the machine and set again.
● If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
● If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then configure the settings
again.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
● Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
Mobile device detection was not possible within the predetermined length of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
439
Troubleshooting
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
● Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 389)
The amount remaining in toner cartridges required for cleaning the fixing unit is insufficient.
● Cleaning requires sufficient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform the
cleaning again.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the WEP settings./
Could not perform Open System auth. Check WEP settings.
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Open System>, but that of a wireless router is set to
"Shared Key."
● Connect again by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Shared Key>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
The MAC address of the machine is rejected because the MAC address filter is set at a wireless router.
● Set the wireless router to permit the MAC address of the machine and your computer. For more
information about how to set, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
<Preferences>
manufacturer. To check the MAC address of the machine, select <Menu>
<Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> <Connection Information>.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 47)
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings./
Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
440
Troubleshooting
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.
● Establish Direct Connection again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 189)
Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout The device will restart./Easy
Conn. via PC ended due to timeout Device will restart.
30 minutes have passed since the start of the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup
mode), but PC still cannot be connected.
● Restart the machine, and then, perform <Easy Connection via PC> again.
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 302)
End of cartridge lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 391)
Google Cloud Print Authentication Error
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
● Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specified.
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 293)
Google Cloud Print Communication Error
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
● Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
● A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
● If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 230)
441
Troubleshooting
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server auth err
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
● Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specified.
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 293)
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server comm err
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
● Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
● A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
● If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 230)
Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
● Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
Load paper.
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.
● Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
● Load appropriate paper for printing reports or lists, and make settings for paper size and paper type.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Available Paper(P. 478)
Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded.
● Load appropriate paper for printing the received document, and make settings for paper size and paper
type.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
442
Troubleshooting
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Available Paper(P. 478)
● If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be
missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.
Mem. full. Check error w/ Status Monitor key.
The memory became full of print data that could not be printed due to errors.
● Cancel printing of documents to which an error has occurred, or print the documents by selecting <Skip
Error> on the screen for checking the printing status.
Canceling Prints(P. 162)
Memory full. Process secure print jobs.
Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed.
● Print the secured documents that are stored in memory.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169)
Memory Full (Secure Print)
Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed.
● Print the secured documents that are stored in memory.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169)
Memory Full (Skip Error)
The memory became full of print data that could not be printed due to errors.
● Cancel printing of documents to which an error has occurred, or print the documents by selecting <Skip
Error> on the screen for checking the printing status.
Canceling Prints(P. 162)
Memory is full.
Printing was impossible due to insufficient memory space.
● If a printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
443
Troubleshooting
Memory Media Print is restricted.
The function that prints files in a USB memory device is disabled.
● Set <Use Print Function> in <Memory Media Settings> to <On>.
Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 256)
No Paper
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot.
● Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
● Load appropriate paper for printing reports or lists, and make settings for paper size and paper type.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Available Paper(P. 478)
Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded.
● Load appropriate paper for printing the received document, and make settings for paper size and paper
type.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
Available Paper(P. 478)
● If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be
missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.
No reply from the destination.
A LAN cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
● Check the status of the LAN cables and switches.
No response from the host./No response from host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
● Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 23)
444
Troubleshooting
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
● Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 454)
Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
● Match the paper size setting specified in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
● If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
● Check that the paper guides in the paper drawer are set in the correct position.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
Prepare cartridge.
Toner cartridge replacement time is near.
● Make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this
message before you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 406)
● When printing, you can continue printing the original.
● If a message is displayed when the machine is receiving a I-Fax, received I-Faxes will be stored in memory so
that they do not appear faded after they are printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in
toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.
Low> to <On>. <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>/<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.
Low>(P. 365)
Printing is restricted.
Printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
445
Troubleshooting
● Log in with a Department ID for which printing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact
your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 212)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key and certificate, user name and password, or CA certificate) is
not set correctly.
● Check the specified authentication method and authentication information (key and certificate, user name
and password, and CA certificate).
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
Set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X authentication has not been configured correctly.
● Configure the IEEE 802.1X correctly from the Remote UI.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
● Match the paper size setting specified in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 137)
● If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
● Check that the paper guides in the paper drawer are set in the correct position.
Loading Paper(P. 121)
The authentication server certificate has expired.
The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.
● Check the valid period of the server certificate on the RADIUS server.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
446
Troubleshooting
The authentication server certificate is incorrect.
There is no CA certificate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication server
certificate.
● Check that there is a CA certificate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication
server certificate.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
The memory is full.
Printing was impossible due to insufficient memory space.
● If a printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
● Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 39)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 33)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 36)
● Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
447
Troubleshooting
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication./Use
Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
● Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.
● Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
● If using TLS, check whether a "key and certificate" is registered.
● If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 250)
448
Troubleshooting
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
2822-074
If an error occurs such as when printing is not successful or when you cannot receive an I-Fax, the corresponding error
code is displayed in the job log screen as a three-digit number. Check the following to find out causes and solutions for
each error code. For details of the job log screen, see <Status Monitor> Screen(P. 107) .
#037
The file is too large to print.
● Optimize the file to reduce the size or divide the file into sections, and then proceed to printing again.
● Try printing from the printer driver. This may work well.
#099
An operation that caused a job to be canceled has been performed.
● When you cancel a job, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print or receive documents
again as necessary.
#408
Read failed because the USB memory device was removed while data was being read from it.
● Check that the USB memory device has not been removed and then read the data again.
Using a USB Memory Device(P. 156)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
The connected USB memory device is using an unsupported format.
● Check that the USB memory device is using a format supported by this machine.
Using a USB Memory Device(P. 156)
#701
Authentication failed because an incorrect Department ID or PIN was entered when the Department ID
Management was activated.
● Enter the correct Department ID and PIN.
449
Troubleshooting
Continuing operating without entering a Department ID was attempted even though unknown-ID jobs
(functions that permit operations without a Department ID and PIN) were disabled in the Department ID
Management.
● Enable unknown-ID jobs in System Manager Mode in Remote UI.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 216)
#752
I-Fax receiving was impossible because an incorrect POP3 server name was set.
● Check the POP3 server name, and correct the setting.
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing(P. 181)
I-Fax receiving was impossible because an incorrect domain name was set.
● Check the domain name, and correct the setting.
Configuring DNS(P. 65)
I-Fax receiving was impossible because the machine was not connected to a network correctly.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 412)
#753
Scanned data could not be received as I-Fax because the LAN cable is disconnected.
● Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 26)
#766
The certificate has expired.
● Update the certificate or use a certificate that has not expired.
● Check that the <Current Date/Time Settings> are correct.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 21)
#802
The POP3 server name is not set correctly.
● Set the POP3 server name correctly.
Receiving I-Faxes for Printing(P. 181)
450
Troubleshooting
#810
An error has been returned from the POP3 server at the time of receiving an I-Fax.
● Check whether the POP3 server is set correctly.
● Check whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your
Network Administrator.
#816
The number of print pages has reached the upper limit specified for the department.
● To reset the print page count, click [Clear Count] on the [Department ID Management] page of Remote UI.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 212)
#818
The received data is in a file format that the machine cannot print.
● Contact the other party and ask them to resend the data in a different file format.
#819
The received data is not supported (incorrect MIME information).
● Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
#820
The received data is not supported (incorrect BASE64 or uuencode information).
● Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
#821
The received data is not supported (a TIFF analysis error occurred).
● Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
#822
An file in a USB memory device could not be printed because the format of the file is not supported.
● Check the supported file formats and save the file again.
451
Troubleshooting
Printer Functions(P. 482)
#827
The received data is not supported (includes unsupported MIME information).
● Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
#829
The received data exceeds the maximum receivable size.
● In I-Fax reception, the machine cannot receive the e-mail if its size exceeds 24 MB. Ask the sender to
reduce the size of the e-mail down to under 24 MB and try resending.
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
● Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet firmly.
#853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing
capability.
● The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per
printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to
print, check the document data for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
● If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error
code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
A secured document that was left unprinted was deleted.
● If the secured document is not printed within a specific period of time (30 minutes by default), it is deleted
from memory. Send the secured document again, and print it within the period.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169)
Printing using Secure Print was attempted when Secure Print was restricted.
● When <Secure Print> is set to <Off>, you cannot use Secure Print. Set the setting to <On> and print again.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 169)
● Print without using Secure Print.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
You tried to print a file that is either corrupted or not supported.
● Check the file and try again.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
452
Troubleshooting
Password protected PDF files could not be printed.
● Enter the correct password for the PDF file.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 173)
#861
A document could not be printed because a printer driver that was not intended for this machine was
used.
● Print again by using the printer driver for this machine.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 160)
A document could not be printed due to a defect in its data.
● Check the document data for any defects.
#863
An error occurred when printing from a computer.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. After the restart is complete, try
printing again.
#995
A document waiting to be received was canceled.
● Receive the document again as necessary.
453
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams
2822-075
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Press <Next> ( ) to display simple solutions. If it is
difficult to understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
Multi-purpose tray/Paper drawer
Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 462)
Interior
Paper Jams in the Main Unit(P. 456)
Duplex transport guide
Paper Jams in the Main Unit(P. 456)
Back side
Paper Jams in the Main Unit(P. 456)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
● Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed.
If paper tears
● Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
454
Troubleshooting
If paper jams repeatedly
● Tap the paper stack on a flat surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
● Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.
Available Paper(P. 478)
● Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.
Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine
● Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 464)
455
Troubleshooting
Paper Jams in the Main Unit
2822-076
Remove the jammed paper according to the procedure that matches the location at which a paper jam occurred.
Interior
Paper Jams
inside the
Machine or in
the Back
Side(P. 456)
Duplex
transport guide
Paper Jams
at the Duplex
Transport
Guide(P. 459)
Back side
Paper Jams
inside the
Machine or in
the Back
Side(P. 456)
Paper Jams inside the Machine or in the Back Side
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to forcibly remove it but instead proceed to the next step.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
456
Troubleshooting
3
Hold the front side green knob and lift the transport guide.
● Keep holding the transport guide until returning it to the original position in step 5.
4
Gently pull out the paper.
5
Gently return the transport guide back in place.
6
Hold the front side green knob and lift the transport guide.
● Keep holding the transport guide until returning it to the original position in step 8.
457
Troubleshooting
7
Gently pull out the paper.
● Pull out the paper flatly as much as possible to prevent unfixed toner from being dropped.
8
Gently return the transport guide back in place.
9
Open the rear cover.
10
Gently pull out the paper.
458
Troubleshooting
11
Close the rear cover.
12
Install the toner cartridge.
● Make sure to push in the cartridge until it stops.
13
Close the front cover.
When the message is still displayed
● Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any. If the
message is still displayed, check whether the front cover is securely closed.
Paper Jams at the Duplex Transport Guide
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
● Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Press the green knob and lower the duplex transport guide.
459
Troubleshooting
3
Gently pull out the paper.
4
Return the duplex transport guide back to position.
● Fully close the guide until it clicks.
5
Set the paper drawer.
6
Open and close the front cover.
● When the front cover is opened and closed, the paper jam message disappears.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Close the front cover.
460
Troubleshooting
When the message is still displayed
● Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any. If the
message is still displayed, check whether the front cover is securely closed.
461
Troubleshooting
Paper Jams in a Paper Source
2822-077
Remove the jammed paper according to the procedure that matches the location at which a paper jam occurred.
Multi-purpose tray
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 462)
Paper drawer
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 462)
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray
If there is paper loaded in the tray, remove it first. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it
out, but follow the procedure for a different paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Gently pull out the paper.
2
Load paper.
3
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 128)
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the screen.
When the message is still displayed
● Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any.
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
462
Troubleshooting
● Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
● When the optional cassette feeding module is attached, gently pull out the paper in the same way.
3
4
Set the paper drawer.
Select <Yes> when the <Is all of the jammed paper removed?> message is displayed
on the screen.
When the message is still displayed
● Paper may be jammed in other locations. Check other locations, and remove jammed paper if any.
463
Troubleshooting
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
2822-078
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
● If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
◼ When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the following information ready:
● Product name (LBP215x / LBP214dw / LBP212dw)
● Dealer where you purchased the machine
● Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
● Serial number (found on the label on the back side of the machine)
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
● Select <Status Monitor> (
)
<Device Information>/<Device Status>
464
<Serial Number>.
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 466
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 468
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 469
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 470
Improving Efficiency ..................................................................................................................................... 471
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 472
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 474
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 475
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 478
Cassette Feeding Module-AH ........................................................................................................................ 481
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 482
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 484
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 486
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 487
Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 488
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 489
System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 490
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 492
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 493
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 494
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 497
Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 499
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 506
465
Appendix
Appendix
2822-079
This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
◼ Machine Specifications
See the following section(s) when you want to check the specifications of the main unit and optional equipment,
network environment, print function, and so on.
Specifications(P. 474)
◼ Using Optional Equipment
See the following section(s) when you want to check what options are available to use this machine more conveniently
and more effectively.
Options(P. 488)
◼ Referencing the Manual of This Machine
See the first of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of
the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this
manual), see the second section.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 492)
Using User's Guide(P. 493)
◼ Others
See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright
information.
466
Appendix
Third Party Software(P. 468)
Feature Highlights(P. 469)
Basic Windows Operations(P. 499)
Notice(P. 506)
467
Appendix
Third Party Software
2822-07A
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
LBP215x
LBP214dw / LBP212dw
468
Appendix
Feature Highlights
2822-07C
This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features
according to your intended purposes and operating environment.
Going Green and Saving Money(P. 470)
Improving Efficiency(P. 471)
So Much More(P. 472)
469
Appendix
Going Green and Saving Money
2822-07E
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing
Sleep Mode
You can use the 2-sided printing function to print data from
your computer and print received I-Fax documents. Because
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that
powers down a machine when nobody is using it has
become an essential feature. This machine will enter
sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to
you'll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you
can cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine
2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on
one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single
sheet, which is both economical and environmentally
friendly.
Printing from a Computer(P. 160)
<Receive>(P. 365)
<I-Fax Settings>
Sides>
<Print on Both
470
sleep whenever you want. Press
once to put the
machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake
the machine back into action.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 154)
Appendix
Improving Efficiency
2822-07F
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient.
Print Images Right Off Your USB Memory Device
Remote Management with Remote UI
Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you
can print images and documents directly, without
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all
without having to go over to the machine. Configure
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an
intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that
you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for
things other than taking care of the machine.
using a computer. You can even preview JPEG and
other images before you print, so there is no wasted
paper.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory
Media Print)(P. 173)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
(P. 259)
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching
between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in
the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make
settings while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 160)
471
Appendix
So Much More
2822-07H
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the office, or even on the road.
Application Library to execute useful functions in onetouch button operation
Using a smartphone/tablet
Application Library is a facility that makes it possible that
frequently used operations such as printing a usual
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a
proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in
handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN
router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile
device wirelessly and directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of
possibilities for work/play with functionality made for
this age of speed.
document and checking the consumables information as
well as convenient functions are registered in the form of
applications. You can execute these applications in onetouch button operation from the Home screen. Make the
best use of Application Library for time reduction and
operational accuracy enhancement. For more
information, see the manual on Application Library on the
online manual website.
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 185)
Keep Your Printouts Private
472
Appendix
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or
cell phone, send your data, and out come your
printed documents. With this machine, Google
Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever
you want from wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 203)
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it
comes out of the printer right away. However, if you have
sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use
secure printing and no one will be able to print your
documents without entering your password on the machine's
operation panel. Don't let your confidential documents lie
exposed on the tray for everyone to see.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
(P. 168)
Go Wireless
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless
LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before
you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that
you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for
tighter security.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 27)
473
Appendix
Specifications
2822-07J
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼ Machine Specifications
Main Unit(P. 475)
Available Paper(P. 478)
◼ Specifications of Optional Equipment
Cassette Feeding Module-AH(P. 481)
◼ Functional Specifications
Printer Functions(P. 482)
Management Functions(P. 484)
◼ Environment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 486)
Network Environment(P. 487)
474
Appendix
Main Unit
2822-07K
● For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see "
Type
Desktop
Color Supported
Black and White
Resolution for Writing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Sizes
Available Paper(P. 478) ."
● Max: 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min (Paper Drawer): 105 mm x 148 mm
● Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 76.2 mm x 127 mm
Paper Weight
● Paper Drawer: 52 g/m² to 120 g/m²
● Multi-Purpose Tray: 52 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Paper Type
Warm-Up Time *1
Available Paper(P. 478)
After Powering ON
14.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
4.0 seconds or less
First Print Time
Approx. 5.4 seconds
(A4)
Print Speed *2
(A4)
LBP215x / LBP214dw:
● 38.0 sheets/minute
LBP212dw:
● 33.0 sheets/minute
Paper Feeding System/Capacity *3 Paper Drawer
250 sheets (80 g/m²)/250 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m²)/100 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
475
Appendix
Paper Output System/Capacity *3 Output Tray
150 sheets (68 g/m²)
Power Source
AC 220 V - 240 V, 3.4 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption *1
Maximum Power Consumption
1,300 W or less
During Sleep Mode
● Approx. 0.9 W (USB connection)
● Approx. 0.9 W (wired LAN connection)
● Approx. 0.9 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
LBP215x:
438 mm x 373 mm x 312 mm
LBP214dw / LBP212dw:
401 mm x 373 mm x 250 mm
Weight
LBP215x:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 9.2 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 406)
LBP214dw / LBP212dw:
Main Unit *4
Approx. 8.8 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 406)
Installation Space
See "Getting Started"
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 492)
Memory Capacity
RAM: 1 GB
Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
*1May
vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*2Print
speed is measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on onesided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print speed
may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*3May
vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
476
Appendix
*4The
toner cartridge is not included.
477
Appendix
Available Paper
2822-07L
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.
◼ Supported Paper Sizes
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
A4 *3*4
B5
A5 *5
A6
Legal (LGL) *3
Letter (LTR) *3*4
Statement (STMT)
Executive (EXEC)
Oficio *3
Oficio (Brazil) *3
Oficio (Mexico) *3
Letter (Government) *3
Legal (Government) *3
Foolscap/Folio *3
Foolscap (Australia) *3
Legal (India) *3
3x5inch
478
Appendix
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Paper Sizes
Envelope No.10 (COM10)
Envelope Monarch
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Custom Paper Size
*6
*1Includes
*7
*8
the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH.
*2Automatic
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Allows
you to print received I-Fax documents.
*4Allows
you to print reports or lists.
*5Landscape
or portrait orientation is available.
*6The
custom size ranging from 105 mm x 148 mm to 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm is available.
*7The
custom size ranging from 76.2 mm x 127 mm to 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm is available.
*8The
custom size ranging from 210 mm x 279.4 mm to 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm is available.
◼ Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Type
Plain 1 *3*4
60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Plain 2 *3*4
75 g/m² to 89 g/m²
Recycled 1 *3*4
60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Recycled 2 *3*4
75 g/m² to 89 g/m²
Heavy 1
90 g/m² to 105 g/m²
Heavy 2
106 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Heavy 3
121 g/m² to 149 g/m²
Heavy 4
150 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
479
Appendix
Paper Type
Thin 1 *3*5
60 g/m²
Thin 2
52 g/m² to 59 g/m²
Bond 1
60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Bond 2
75 g/m² to 104 g/m²
Bond 3
105 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Labels
Envelope
Envelope H
*1Includes
the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH.
*2Automatic
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Allows
you to print received I-Fax documents.
*4Allows
you to print reports or lists.
*5Select
this if paper curl occurs when the paper type setting <Plain 1> is specified for paper of 60 g/m².
480
Appendix
Cassette Feeding Module-AH
2822-07R
Paper Sizes
● Max: 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min: 105 mm x 148 mm
Paper Weight
52 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Paper Drawers Capacity *
550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Dimensions
399 mm x 373 mm x 156 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight
Approx. 3.8 kg
*May
vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
481
Appendix
Printer Functions
2822-07S
◼ UFR II Printer Function
Type
Internal
Print Size
Available Paper(P. 478)
Print Speed
Main Unit(P. 475)
Resolution
Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
Resident Fonts
None
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
◼ PS Printer Function*
Type
Internal
Print Size
Available Paper(P. 478)
Print Speed
Main Unit(P. 475)
Resolution
Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe PS 3
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
482
Appendix
Resident Fonts
136 Roman
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
*The
PS printer function is available with the LBP215x / LBP214dw.
◼ PCL Printer Function
Type
Internal
Print Size
Available Paper(P. 478)
Print Speed
Main Unit(P. 475)
Resolution
Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi (only for PCL6), 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
Resident Fonts
LBP215x
93 Roman
LBP214dw / LBP212dw
45 Roman
Interface
USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
◼ Memory Media Print Function
Printable File Formats
● JPEG (DCF/Exif 2.21 or earlier/JFIF)
● TIFF (JPEG/MH/MR/MMR compression)
● PDF
483
Appendix
Management Functions
2822-07U
◼ Firewall Settings
● Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6.
● The packet filters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
● Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specified.
◼ IPSec
● IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
● Windows Vista
● Windows 7
Operating system
● Windows 8
● Windows 8.1
● Windows 10
Connection mode
Transport mode
IKEv1 (main mode)
● Pre-shared key
Authentication method
Key exchange protocol
● Digital signature
Hash algorithm
● HMAC-SHA1-96
(and key length)
● HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
● 3DES-CBC
● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Diffie-Hellman (DH)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
● Group 1 (768 bits)
● Group 2 (1024 bits)
● Group 14 (2048 bits)
Hash algorithm
ESP
HMAC-SHA1-96
● 3DES-CBC
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key
length)
AH
Hash algorithm
AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
HMAC-SHA1-96
● IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).
● The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
484
Appendix
◼ Registration of Keys and Certificates
● If you install a key or CA certificate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
● Key: PKCS#12*1
Format
● CA certificate: X.509 DER/PEM
● Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"
File extension
● CA certificate: ".cer" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
● RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
● DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
● ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
● RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*2, SHA-512*2, MD2, MD5
Certificate signature algorithm
● DSA: SHA-1
● ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
Certificate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1Requirements
*2SHA384-RSA
for the certificate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certificates.
and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
● The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL).
◼ Definition of "Weak Encryption"
When <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.
Hash:
MD4, MD5, SHA-1
HMAC:
HMAC-MD5
Common key cryptosystem:
RC2, RC4, DES
Public key cryptosystem:
RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024
bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)
● Even when <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>/<Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>, the
hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for signing a root certificate, can be used.
485
Appendix
System Environment
2822-07W
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows
● Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later
● Windows 10: Edge
macOS
● Mac OS X 10.5 or later
● Safari 5.0.6 or later
Android
● Chrome
● UC Browser
iOS
● Safari
● UC Browser
I-Fax Receiving Server Software
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
● Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
● Lotus Domino R7.0
● Qpopper 4.0.19
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
● Internet Explorer 9 or later
● Microsoft Edge
● Firefox
● Firefox ESR
● Chrome*2
macOS
● Safari
● Firefox
● Chrome*2
Linux
● Firefox
iOS
● Safari*2
Android
● Chrome*2
*1Before
*2Only
changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
when viewing manuals on the Internet.
486
Appendix
Network Environment
2822-07X
◼ Common Specifications
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP
● Frame type: Ethernet II
● Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10
Mobile Print
◼ Wired LAN Specifications
Interface
Interface supporting 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
◼ Wireless LAN Specifications
Standard
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme
IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range
2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.9 dBm
Communication Mode
● Infrastructure Mode
● Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method)
Infrastructure Mode
● 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
● WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
● WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
487
Appendix
Options
2822-07Y
Installing options on the machine enables you to use more features.
◼ Knowing What Types of Options are Available
Optional Equipment(P. 489)
System Options(P. 490)
◼ Looking for Optional Equipment by Purpose
Adding a Paper Drawer
Cassette Feeding Module-AH(P. 489)
488
Appendix
Optional Equipment
2822-080
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Cassette Feeding Module-AH
Installing this cassette feeding module enables you to load paper of a different size
than that of paper loaded in the standard paper drawer. This surely reduces the time
and labor for paper replacement.
489
Appendix
System Options
2822-081
The machine performance can be enhanced even more by installing system options.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 490)
License Registration(P. 490)
Barcode Printing Kit
This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print barcodes, PCL must be
enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).
License Registration
To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.
◼ Obtaining a License Key
You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http://
www.canon.com/lms/license) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the
following numbers.
License Access Number
Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the
package of the option.
Serial Number of the Machine
Check the serial number on the operation panel.
<Status Monitor>
<Device Information>
<Serial Number>
◼ Registering a License Key
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 104)
● If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
Logging in to the Machine(P. 120)
3
Select <License/Other>
4
Confirm the message on the screen, and select <OK>.
<Register License>.
490
Appendix
5
Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.
➠ Registration starts. Wait until the <Installation is complete. Changes will be effective after the main power
is turned OFF and ON.> message is displayed.
● If the <The feature required for installation is not present.> message is displayed, enable the functions
that are required to activate the option and register the license key again.
6
Select <Close>.
7
Restart the machine.
491
Appendix
Manuals and Their Contents
2822-082
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started
Read this manual first. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
User's Guide (This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specific topic. Using User's Guide(P. 493)
492
Appendix
Using User's Guide
2822-083
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼ Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens configuring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.
Layout of User's Guide(P. 494)
Screen
◼ Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 497)
◼ Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to fit to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
● If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
● You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
● Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 495) .
493
Appendix
Screen Layout of User's Guide
2822-084
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click
to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click
to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
494
Appendix
Topic Page
Contains information about how to configure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
/
Click
to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click
to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click
to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and find the page
you are looking for.
495
Appendix
[Enter keyword(s) here]
to display the search results. You can search for pages
Enter a keyword or keywords and click
containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
● The specified keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
496
Appendix
Viewing User's Guide
2822-085
This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if
not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these
items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for
a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type
Example
Keys on the operation panel
<Timer/Energy Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Settings displayed on the operation panel
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
● A case in which a user taps a button on the display for the touch panel model, and a case in which a
user presses a key on the operation panel for the black and white LCD model are described even
when their operations are the same. For example, the operation for displaying the <Status Monitor>
screen is represented by "Press <Status Monitor> (
497
)."
Appendix
/
/
(Black and White LCD Model)
,
, and
on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is
omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using
or
and pressing
is
represented as shown below in the User's Guide.
1
Select <XXXXX>.
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP215x. Depending on the model
or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from
the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP215x. The illustrations of the
toner cartridge are those for the Canon Cartridge 052.
498
Appendix
Basic Windows Operations
2822-087
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 499)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 500)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 501)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 501)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 502)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 503)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 504)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 505)
● Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.
◼ Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System]
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel]
select [Control Panel]
[View devices and printers].
[View devices and printers].
[Control Panel]
[Hardware and Sound]
[Devices and Printers].
double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel]
[Hardware]
[Devices and Printers].
◼ Enabling [Network discovery]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Network discovery].
[View network status and tasks]
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Change advanced sharing settings]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
499
Appendix
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced sharing
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center]
discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced
select [Turn on network
[Change advanced sharing
◼ Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs]
[Accessories]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [File Explorer].
[Windows Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [File Explorer].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2
Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
● To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠ Shared printers are displayed.
500
Appendix
◼ Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer.
2
Open the printer folder.
3
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
4
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 123)
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
[Properties].
➠ The test page is printed.
◼ Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1
Display [Control Panel].
501
Appendix
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
2
Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security]
Windows 10/Server 2016
Click [ ] [Settings] [System]
[System].
select [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼ Checking the Printer Port
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
502
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 54)
◼ Checking Bidirectional Communication
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 499)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
503
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼ Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click
SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.
504
,
,
, or
in the system tray to display the
Appendix
◼ When Printing from the Windows Store App
Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
use [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application
Tap or click [Devices]
The driver that you use
Tap or click [Devices]
[Print]
The driver that you use
[Print].
The driver that you
[Print].
● If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
● If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
505
Appendix
Notice
2822-088
◼ IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼ Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name
Power consumption of the product in networked standby
LBP215x / LBP214dw / LBP212dw 3.0 W or less
● The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
◼ WEEE and Battery Directives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canoneurope.com/battery.
506
Appendix
◼ Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star ®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benefits and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
◼ Disclaimers
● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
● CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼ Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, Safari, AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
507
Appendix
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other
countries.
Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other
countries.
508
Appendix
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼ Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
◼ Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil
liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are
uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document,
and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your
legal advisor for guidance.
● Paper Money
● Travelers Checks
● Money Orders
● Food Stamps
● Certificates of Deposit
● Passports
● Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Immigration Papers
● Identifying Badges or Insignias
● Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Selective Service or Draft Papers
● Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
● Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
● Stock Certificates
● Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
● Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
V_181009
509
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source files, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
510
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or
binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
511
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions
below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices,
falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
-1-
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3
3
Adobe PDF Scan Library
10
expat
13
HarfBuzz 2012-07-30
14
libjingle
15
Lua
16
LuaSocket
17
MD4
18
Net-SNMP
19
OpenSSL
27
-2-
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-3-
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-4-
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
-5-
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
-6-
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-7-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
-8-
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
-9-
Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 10 -
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 11 -
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu . This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or
Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 12 -
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 13 -
HarfBuzz 2012-07-30
Copyright (C) 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright (C) 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner Lemberg
Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright (C) 2004,2007 Red Hat, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright
notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS,
OR MODIFICATIONS.
- 14 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 15 -
Lua
Copyright © 1994–2014 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 16 -
LuaSocket
LuaSocket 2.0.2 license
Copyright © 2004-2007 Diego Nehab
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 17 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 18 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 19 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 20 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 21 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 22 -
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 23 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 24 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 25 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 26 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 27 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 28 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 29 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 30 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions
below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices,
falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
-1-
The Software Subjected to the Other LicenseConditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3
3
expat
10
libjingle
11
MD4
12
Net-SNMP
13
OpenSSL
21
-2-
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-3-
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com.
For
more
information
on
the
Apache
Software
Foundation,
please
see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-4-
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
-5-
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
-6-
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-7-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
-8-
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
-9-
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
topermit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be includedin all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT,TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 10 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 11 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 12 -
Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
- 13 -
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 14 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
- 15 -
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- 16 -
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
- 17 -
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
- 18 -
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 19 -
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 20 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 21 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 22 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 23 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 24 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising